JP7192805B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for a pachinko machine, a lottery is held based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a changing pattern is displayed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed. A configuration is known in which, when a winning result is obtained, a combination of specific patterns is finally displayed on the display screen, and a transition to a special game state advantageous to the player is made. Then, when the state shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device (for example, See Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-261415 A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 provides the effect content of the first effect and the effect content of the second effect when the corresponding state is one of the predetermined state and the state that is not the predetermined state. a corresponding control means for controlling so that regularity occurs between
The regularity does not occur between the performance content of the first performance and the performance content of the second performance in the non-corresponding state that is the other of the predetermined state and the state not in the predetermined state. a non-corresponding control means for controlling so as to be
determination means for executing a determination process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the result of the determination processing being the award result;
with
As game states, there are a first state in which benefits are relatively easily granted to the player and a second state in which benefits are relatively difficult to be granted to the player,
This game machine is
means for generating the first state based on the fact that the result of the determination process is the first imparting result among the imparting results;
means for generating the second state based on the fact that the result of the determination process is the second imparting result among the imparting results;
with
The predetermined state is the second state, and a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish between the first state and the second state as the notification state of the gaming machine. and
It is characterized in that the control by the non-corresponding control means is not performed when it is in the corresponding state.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (a) to (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the pattern display device. 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the pattern display device; FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a success/failure table for a low-probability mode; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a success/failure table for a high-probability mode; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a distribution table; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a game state transition mode when a hit result is obtained; It is a flowchart which shows the main process in main side MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing in main side MPU. It is a flow chart showing a special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing display duration acquisition processing in the main MPU; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special figure decision in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the counter subtraction process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the mode transition processing in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric end processing in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition processing in main side MPU. 10 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in the sound and light MPU; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing main side command correspondence processing in the sound and light side MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a production pattern table; 10 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing in the display-side MPU; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pattern data table; 10 is a flowchart showing ending command output processing in the main MPU; 10 is a flowchart showing ending handling processing in the sound and light side MPU; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a display mode is randomly selected; 10 is a flowchart showing mode processing in the sound and light side MPU; 1 is a schematic diagram for explaining an outline of an electrical configuration of a game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines are installed; FIG. (a) A block diagram for explaining the configuration for communication between the main controller, the hall computer, and the external device, and the electrical configuration of the external device; (b) the front of the external terminal board; It is a diagram. (a) is a flowchart showing an external output process at the start of fluctuation in the main MPU, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a command correspondence table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect|presentation control processing for game rounds in external side MPU. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the interlocking effect for the game round to be executed by the external device. (a) is a flowchart showing an external output setting process at the start of a bonus in the main MPU, and (b) a flowchart showing an external output setting process at the end of the bonus in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus effect control processing in external side MPU. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining how a game cycle reproduction effect is performed on an external display device; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the external display device performs an effect for predicting the end criterion number of times of the high probability mode; (b) the pattern display device is the end criterion of the high probability mode; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how an effect for predicting the number of times is performed; FIG. 11 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration for communicating among a main control device, a sound emission control device, a display control device, a hall computer, and an external device according to the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing main side command correspondence processing in the sound and light side MPU; FIG. (a) is a flow chart showing display-side command handling processing in the sound and light side MPU, and (b) is a flow chart showing specific character presentation control processing in the external MPU. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining how an effect using a specific character is performed on the pattern display device and the external display device; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing external output processing at the start of variation executed by the main MPU in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing main side command correspondence processing in the sound and light side MPU; FIG. It is a front view of a pachinko machine and an external device in a fourth embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. FIG. 2 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration for communication among the main control device, sound emission control device, hall computer, and external device; It is a flowchart which shows the command output process in main side MPU. 4 is a flowchart showing external control processing in an external MPU; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing production pattern determination processing executed by the sound and light side MPU in the fifth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing production pattern determination processing executed by the sound and light side MPU in the sixth embodiment. FIG.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 2, the configuration within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 1, has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. . The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. A pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by fixing an outer frame 11 to an island facility. Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to have the outer frame 11, and the pachinko machine 10 may have a structure in which the outer frame 11 is attached to the island facilities of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its turning tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 that has substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 . A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21 . The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window holes 23 of the resin base 21 .

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24. FIG.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The guide rail is configured as A game ball shot from a game ball shooting mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by guide rails.

Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeder 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 55a, which will be described later, onto the launch rail 27a, and a and a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. When a shooting operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, a solenoid 27c is driven and controlled to shoot a game ball.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special figure unit 37, a general figure unit 38, etc. ing.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game ball is put out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33 and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when a ball enters the first working port 33 or when a ball enters the second working port 34, three prize balls are paid out. , when a ball enters the general prize winning port 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. executed.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, although the number of prize balls is smaller in the second operation port 34 than in the first operation port 33, the specific number of prize balls may be different from the above. , the second operating port 34 may have a larger number of prize balls than the first operating port 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members such as windmills.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening. A mode in which the liquid continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of game balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into the game ball is also expressed as winning.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24 . Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are open upward. Further, the two operating ports 33 and 34 are vertically aligned with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second operating port 34 is provided with a universal electrical accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. A game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34 when the universal electrical role 34a is closed, and the winning to the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal electrical role 34a is in the open state.

A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operation port 34 in the direction in which the game ball flows. The through-gate 35 has a through-hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and a game ball entering the through-gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34. - 特許庁

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the internal lottery is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the general figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner which is the area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. Variation display of the pattern is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electric power open winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the universal diagram display section 38a ends, the state shifts to the electric power open state. In the common electric open state, the common electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, the normal figure display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device. , CRT or other type of display such as a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern variably displayed in the normal figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal pattern unit 38, a normal pattern holding display portion 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal pattern display portion 38a. The number of winning game balls in the through gate 35 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the normal figure reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is performed with the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the result of the lottery is clearly shown through the display effect on the special figure unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36. - 特許庁

In detail, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a. The display area of the special figure display portion 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. In the special figure display section 37a, a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed by performing a winning lottery with the winning of the first operation opening 33 or the winning of the second operation opening 34 as a trigger. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, the special figure display unit 37a is configured by a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , CRT or other type of display such as a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern displayed in the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or multiple types of colors is displayed.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure reservation display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls won in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is reserved up to four, and the number of reservations is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display part 37b.

More specifically, the pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display screen such as a CRT, or a dot matrix display device. may

In the design display device 41, when the fluctuation display or the predetermined display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display unit 37a based on the winning to the first operation port 33 or the winning to the second operation port 34, the pattern is displayed according to it A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. In the symbol display device 41, not only the display effects triggered by the winning of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, but also the display effects during the opening/closing execution mode, which will be described later, after winning is won, etc. is done.

The display contents when the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display of the symbols will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. FIG. 4 is a view showing individual symbols that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 4(a) to 4(j), the pattern, which is one type of pattern, consists of 9 types of main patterns to which numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached, and a shell-shaped picture pattern. It is composed of a sub pattern. More specifically, nine types of character patterns, such as an octopus, are assigned numerals "1" to "9", respectively, to form the main pattern.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 is provided with three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower rows as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, 9 types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 kinds of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the upper part, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. On the display surface 41a, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), the display surface 41a is designed to stop-display three symbols for each row of symbols. It's like In addition, as shown in FIG. 5A, the display surface 41a is provided with five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a downward-sloping line L4, and an upward-sloping line L5. .

When the symbols are varied and displayed on the display surface 41a based on the winning of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction. The variable display starts as follows. Then, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of upper pattern row Z1→lower pattern row Z3→middle pattern row Z2, and finally, predetermined symbols are displayed still in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and the display is finished. . Also, when the fluctuation display of the pattern ends, if the result of the internal lottery is either the low-probability jackpot result or the advantageous jackpot result A to C, which will be described later, the same pattern will be displayed on any of the effective lines. A combination is formed.

In addition, based on winning a prize to one of the operation ports 33 and 34, the display is started in the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and it is one game round until the predetermined result is displayed and finished. times. In addition, the pattern display device 41 may arbitrarily display the patterns in any manner without being limited to the above. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the patterns displayed variably on the pattern display device 41 are not limited to the above-described patterns, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the patterns.

Returning to the description of FIG. 3, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery based on winning to the first operating port 33 or winning to the second operating port 34, winning to the special electric prize winning device 32 is possible. Switch to open/close execution mode. The special electric prize winning device 32 includes a large prize winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a for opening and closing the big winning opening. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can win prizes when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. It has become. Incidentally, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a winning result is obtained. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21 . As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 through which substantially the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass in a colorless and transparent manner, but is not limited to this, and may be made of a synthetic resin in a colorless and transparent manner. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

A display light-emitting portion 53 is provided above the window portion 51 . A pair of left and right speaker units 54 are provided for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state. An upper bulging portion 55 bulging forward and a lower bulging portion 56 are vertically arranged below the window portion 51 . An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that likewise opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. As shown in FIG. The upper tray 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device, which will be described later, and guiding them toward the game ball launching mechanism 27 while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 56a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 55a.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24) for main control of the game. The main controller 60 has a main control board housed in a board box. In addition, the substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the circuit board box are combined inseparably, and the structure of the joint part that requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating, and the adhesive layer that remains on the adhesion target when peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of the fact that it has been sealed is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a structure in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box is conceivable.

A back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60.例文帳に追加The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 made of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism 73 and a controller assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72 .

The payout mechanism part 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75 . The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76.例文帳に追加The payout mechanism 73 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power ON and OFF.

The control device assembly unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling a payout device 76, and a predetermined electric power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and output, and is accompanied by the operation of the shooting operation device 28 by the player. A power supply/shooting control device 78 for controlling the launching of game balls is provided. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

The back pack 72 is provided with an external terminal plate 79 in addition to the payout mechanism section 73 and the controller assembly unit 74 . The external terminal plate 79 is installed on the back of the pachinko machine 10 at the upper corner portion on the rotation base end side of the back pack unit 15 . The external terminal board 79 is a board for outputting a predetermined signal in order to make the management computer of the game hall recognize the state of the pachinko machine 10, and inputting a predetermined signal from the management computer of the game hall to the pachinko machine 10. is.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control device 60 comprises a main control board 61 that controls the main game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 . The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 62, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 63. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 62, and they may be individually integrated into chips. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than main control device 60 .

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60 . A power supply/emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65 , and power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 65 .

Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 66a to 66e are connected to the input side of the MPU62. The various winning detection sensors 66a to 66e are provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to the winning-corresponding ball-entering portions such as the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35. A detection sensor is included, and the MPU 62 makes a prize winning determination for each ball entering portion. Further, in the MPU 62, various lotteries are executed based on winnings to the first actuation opening 33 and the second actuation opening 34. FIG.

The output side of the MPU 62 is connected with a power outage monitoring board 65, a payout control device 77 and a sound emission control device 80. A winning ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning ball portion. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 80 . Details of these various commands will be described later. Note that the MPU 62 transmits commands to the sound emission control device 80 by parallel communication.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 62, a drive unit 32b for the special electric that opens and closes the open/close door 32a of the special electric prize winning device 32, and a drive unit 34b for the general electric that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation opening 34. , a special figure unit 37 and a general figure unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a and a special figure reservation display section 37b, but all of these are connected to the output side of the MPU62. Similarly, the normal map unit 38 is provided with a normal map display unit 38a and a normal map reservation display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the driving section 32b for the special electric so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, when the general electric accessory 34a is won in the open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the general electric drive unit 34b so that the general electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. Moreover, display control of the special figure display part 37a is performed in MPU62 in the case of each game time. In addition, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the universal electric accessory 34a is specified, the MPU 62 controls the display of the universal diagram display unit 38a. In addition, when the winning prize to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs, or when the variable display is started in the special figure display unit 37a, the display control of the special figure reservation display unit 37b is executed in the MPU 62 Then, when a winning to the through gate 35 occurs, or when variable display is started in the normal pattern display unit 38a, the MPU 62 performs display control of the normal pattern reservation display unit 38b.

The blackout monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 78, and monitors the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 78, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command input from the main controller 60 .

The power/emission control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, etc. are generated with the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is used as the main power supply. Power for storing data is supplied to the RAM 64 of the control device 60 . The power/shooting control device 78 controls the shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 27, and the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met.

The audio emission control device 80 includes an audio emission control board 81 on which an MPU 82 is mounted. The MPU 82 includes a ROM 83 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 82, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 83. A RAM 84, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are incorporated.

Based on the command received from the main controller 60, the MPU 82 determines the contents of the effects to be executed in the game rounds, opening/closing execution mode, and the like. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 provided on the front door frame 14 is performed and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 provided on the front door frame 14 is performed so that an operation corresponding to the determined content is performed. I do.

The MPU 82 is electrically connected to the display control device 90 . The MPU 82 transmits to the display control device 90 a command including the content of the effect determined based on the command received from the main control device 60 and a command including the content of notification corresponding to the command received from the main control device 60. Note that the display control device 90 is not configured to receive commands from the main control device 60 without going through the sound emission control device 80 , and in relation to the main control device 60 , communication is performed rather than the sound emission control device 80 . It can be said that it exists on the downstream side of the direction.

The display control device 90 includes a display control board 91 on which an MPU 92, which is an element in which a program ROM 93 and a work RAM 94 are integrated, a video display processor (VDP) 95, a character ROM 96, and a video RAM 97 are mounted. It has

The MPU 92 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 80 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 95 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 95).

The program ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 92 and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. The work RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when various programs are executed by the MPU 92, and is a volatile storage means that requires power supply from the outside to hold stored information. is.

The VDP 95 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . Since the VDP 95 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 95 adjusts the timings of the MPU 92, the video RAM 97, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 96 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 96 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

The video RAM 97 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 , and the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM 97 .

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 62, ROM 63 and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63 and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 82, ROM 83 and RAM 84 of the sound emission control device 80 are respectively referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63 and main RAM 64. The MPU 92, the program ROM 93 and the work RAM 94 of the display control device 90 are called the display side MPU 92, the display side ROM 93 and the display side RAM 94, respectively.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, commands are exchanged between the sound and light side MPU 82 and the display side MPU 92 by two-way communication.

That is, the audio emission control device 80 and the display control device 90 are electrically connected using the first signal line group 101, and the first signal line group 101 is used to transmit signals from the sound and light side MPU 82 to the display side MPU 92. A command is sent to Since this command transmission is performed by serial communication, the first signal line group 101 includes a signal line 102 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, 1-bit data) included in the command data. It includes at least a signal line 103 for a clock signal for identification and a signal line 104 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of transmission start and transmission end of one command. It should be noted that a configuration in which a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission is separately provided may be employed.

Also, the audio emission control device 80 and the display control device 90 are electrically connected using the second signal line group 111, and the second signal line group 111 is used to transmit signals from the display side MPU 92 to the sound and light side MPU 82. A command is sent to Since this command transmission is performed by serial communication, the second signal line group 111 includes a signal line 112 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, 1-bit data) included in the command data. At least a signal line 113 for a clock signal for identification and a signal line 114 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of transmission start and transmission end of one command are included. It should be noted that a configuration in which a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission is separately provided may be employed.

The first signal line group 101 and the second signal line group 111 are provided as one connection unit. The connection unit includes a connector to which one ends of the first signal line group 101 and the second signal line group 111 are aggregated, and a connector to which the other ends are aggregated. 80 is detachably attached, and the other connector is detachably attached to the display control device 90 connector.

The communication method between the sound and light side MPU 82 and the display side MPU 92 is not limited to serial communication, and parallel communication may be used. Alternatively, the first signal line group 101 and the second signal line group 111 may be provided as separate connection units.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in MPU 62 of main controller 60>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 62 uses various counter information during the game to set the jackpot occurrence lottery, the display of the special figure display unit 37a, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, the setting of the display of the normal figure display unit 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, when the winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery of winning generation, the big winning type counter C2 used when judging the big winning type, and the pattern display device 41 come off and fluctuate. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the variation type that determines the display duration time in the special figure display unit 37a and the pattern display device 41 A counter CS is used. Furthermore, it is decided to use the general electric role item open counter C4 used for the lottery of whether or not the general electric role item 34aa of the second operation port 34 is in the general electric open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM64.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided in the RAM 64 as acquisition information storage means when a prize is won in the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34. It is stored in the reserved storage area 64a.

The pending storage area 64a comprises a pending area RE and an execution area AE. The reservation area RE includes a first reservation area RE1, a second reservation area RE2, a third reservation area RE3, and a fourth reservation area RE4. In addition, a combination of each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as reserved information in one of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs multiple times in succession, the first reservation area RE1 → the second Each numerical information is stored chronologically in order of reservation area RE2→third reservation area RE3→fourth reservation area RE4. By providing four reservation areas RE1 to RE4 in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 are retained and stored. .

It should be noted that the number that can be retained and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical value information stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a, and the start of one game round. At that time, the success or failure determination is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the universal electrical role item release counter C4 will be described. For example, the general electric role item release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The general electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the general electric reservation area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric role item 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric role item opening counter C4.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the mode of support by the general electric role item 34a is different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with a situation where game balls are continuously shot in a similar manner to the game area, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 A high frequency support mode and a low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the open state is relatively high and low.

In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the general electric open state in the general electric open lottery using the general electric accessory open counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). , in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the general electrical role 34a is in the open state when the general electrical open state is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the open time for one time is set longer. It is In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the general electric open state is won and the open state of the general electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times, the time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (that is, the The duration of one display on the display section 38a) is set short.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operation opening 33 is higher than in the second operation opening 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation opening is higher than the first operation opening 33. The probability of winning a prize to the mouth 34 is increased. When a prize is awarded to the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of balls in his hand too much. It can be carried out.

In addition, the configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequent than the low-frequency support mode to become the electric power open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, in the electric power open lottery A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning the electric power open state is increased. In addition, after one general electric open lottery is performed, the time secured for the next general electric open lottery In a configuration where multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, in the high-frequency support mode, it is easier to select a shorter reserved time than in the low-frequency support mode, or is set so that the average reserved time is shorter. good too. In addition, the number of open times is increased, the open time is lengthened, and the secured time that is secured after one electric power open lottery is held and the next electric power open lottery is held is shortened. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 599 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserve storage area 64a of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening .

The values of the random numbers to be won are stored in the ROM 63 as a success/failure table. Here, the contents of the success/failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the success/failure table for the low-probability mode of FIG. 8(a) and the success/failure table for the high-probability mode of FIG. 8(b) are set as the success/failure table. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as lottery modes in the lottery means.

Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. ”). On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. It is set more than when the table is referenced, specifically 20 (for example, "5", "34", "65", "130", "163", "192", "220"). ", "245", "276", "305", "334", "365", "392", "420", "470", "495", "520", "558", "575", "599"). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that results in the jackpot winning in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that results in the jackpot winning in the high probability mode.

If the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers for winning are arbitrary. The value group of the winning random number counter C1 may be partially included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 for winning the jackpot in the high-probability mode, or may not be included. .

In both the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode, a small win can be won even if a big win is not won in the winning lottery. Winning a jackpot serves as a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, and can serve as a trigger for shifting to at least one of the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. Neither the lottery mode nor the support mode will trigger the transition. In other words, when a big win is won, at least one of the success/failure lottery mode and the support mode may be different from the mode before the start of the opening/closing execution mode after the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, whereas a small win is won. In this case, after the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, both the winner/failure lottery mode and the support mode become the same as the modes before the start of the opening/closing execution mode.

Under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to, as shown in FIG. are also set. Specifically, there are three random number values (for example, "55", "355", and "555") for winning a small hit. On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the winning/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to, as shown in FIG. The number of values of the random numbers is set more than the number, and the number of values of the random numbers is set more than when the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to. Specifically, there are five random numbers (for example, "55", "205", "355", "455", and "555") for winning a small hit.

In each lottery mode, the lottery results are lost except for the value of the random number for winning the big prize and the value of the random number for winning the small prize. In the case of a result of a failure, no shifts triggered by the result of the lottery occur in any of the opening/closing execution mode, the win/fail lottery mode, and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 49 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserve storage area 64a of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening .

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of jackpot results are set, and each of these jackpot results includes (1) the contents of the opening/closing execution mode, (2) the contents of the win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, ( 3) At least one of the three contents of the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is different.

The opening/closing execution mode executed when a jackpot is won is a round number regulation mode executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit. A round game is a game that continues until either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins a special electric prize winning device 32 is satisfied. That is. In addition, the number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode is the fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of the jackpot result that triggered the shift. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of the jackpot result.

The round number regulation mode includes a high frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode so that the frequency of winning to the special electric winning device 32 is relatively high and low during the period from the start of the opening and closing execution mode to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. and are set. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of one-time opening mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 are set with different opening durations from when the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened to when it is closed. there is Specifically, a long-time mode in which the open duration is set to 29 sec, which is a long time, and a short-time mode, in which the open duration is set to 0.1 sec, which is a shorter time than the long time, are set. ing. In the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area every 0.6 seconds. be. In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open duration time is set to be longer than the product of the game ball shooting cycle and the upper limit number of one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, a time shorter than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of one round game, more specifically, an open duration time shorter than the game ball firing cycle is set. ing. Therefore, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once in a long time mode, it is expected that the special electric prize winning device 32 will win the maximum number of prizes in one round game. When the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once in the mode, it is expected that no prize will be won to the special electric prize winning device 32, or only one prize will be awarded.

In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a long time mode in each round game. That is, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened 15 times according to the long time mode. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode in each round game. In other words, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened 15 times in the short time mode.

In the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of times of opening and closing the special electric winning device 32, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game is higher than the low-frequency winning mode, and is not limited to the above value, and is arbitrary is.

By the way, the opening and closing execution mode executed when the small hit is won is that the round game is not set, the number of opening and closing times of the special electric prize winning device 32 is the upper limit number of times, and the predetermined upper limit number of games The opening/closing number regulation mode is ended based on the fulfillment of either one of the conditions that the ball wins the special electric prize winning device 32 . In the opening/closing number regulation mode, the opening/closing of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the short time manner is performed the same number of times as the opening/closing number of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round number regulation mode. In other words, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened 15 times in the short time mode. In this case, the upper limit number of conditions for ending the opening/closing number regulation mode is set to nine. As already explained, the open duration in the short-time mode is 0.1 sec, and the game ball firing cycle is 0.6 sec. It is set to a time shorter than the product of the firing cycle and the upper limit number of opening/closing number regulation mode. Therefore, in the opening/closing number regulation mode, a round game is not executed, and whether or not the total number of winning prizes in the opening/closing number regulation mode is the upper limit is determined. is more likely to be opened and closed.

The allocation destination of the type of the jackpot result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 63 as a distribution table. As shown in FIG. 9, the distribution table contains low-probability jackpot results, non-explicit high-probability jackpot results, explicit high-probability jackpot results, advantageous jackpot results A, and An advantageous jackpot result B and an advantageous jackpot result C are set.

The mode of transition of the game state in the case of a big hit result will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 10 . In addition, in the following description with reference to FIG. 10, the mode of transition of the game state in the case of a small winning result will also be described.

A low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency prize winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/failure lottery mode becomes a low-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. This low-probability mode will continue at least until the next big win results, resulting in transition to the open/close execution mode. In addition, the high-frequency support mode continues until the number of games after the transition reaches the high-frequency end reference number (specifically, 100 times) set as the number of times of 1 or more, and then the low-frequency support mode transition to This low-frequency support mode will continue at least until the next big win result, resulting in transition to the opening and closing execution mode.

The non-explicit high-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and furthermore, the winning/failure lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-probability mode continues until the number of games reaches the maximum end reference number of times (specifically, 70 times) set as the number of times of 1 or more after the shift, and then shifts to the low-probability mode. This low-probability mode will continue at least until the next big win results, resulting in transition to the open/close execution mode. In addition, if the mode before switching to the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency support mode, the support mode will be the high frequency support mode, while if the mode before switching to the opening and closing execution mode is the low frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode will be the jackpot. This is the result. When the high-frequency support mode is entered, the success/fail lottery mode continues until the high-probability mode shifts to the low-probability mode. Also, the low-frequency support mode continues at least until the next big win results and the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is made accordingly.

The explicit high-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/failure lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . These high probability mode and high frequency support mode continue until the number of games after the transition reaches the longest end reference number of times (specifically 70 times) set as the number of times of 1 or more, and then the low probability mode and Move to infrequent support mode. These low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode continue at least until the next big win results and the opening/closing execution mode is thereby entered.

The advantageous jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency prize winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/failure lottery mode becomes a high-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the number of games after the transition reaches the shortest completion reference number (specifically 30 times) set as the number of times of 1 or more, and then the low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode. Move to infrequent support mode. These low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode continue at least until the next big win results and the opening/closing execution mode is thereby entered.

The advantageous jackpot result B is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency prize winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/failure lottery mode becomes a high-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. These high probability mode and high frequency support mode continue until the number of games after the transition reaches the intermediate end reference number of times (specifically 50 times) set as the number of times of 1 or more, and then the low probability mode and high frequency support mode Move to infrequent support mode. These low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode continue at least until the next big win results and the opening/closing execution mode is thereby entered.

The advantageous jackpot result C is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency prize winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the success/fail lottery mode becomes a high-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. These high probability mode and high frequency support mode continue until the number of games after the transition reaches the longest end reference number of times (specifically 70 times) set as the number of times of 1 or more, and then the low probability mode and Move to infrequent support mode. These low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode continue at least until the next big win results and the opening/closing execution mode is thereby entered.

The small winning result is a game result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the opening/closing number regulation mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, both the success/fail lottery mode and the support mode are maintained in the mode before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. The lottery mode and the support mode are continued at least until a next big win results and a transition to the opening/closing execution mode is made accordingly.

In the non-explicit high-probability jackpot result and the explicit high-probability jackpot result, the mode is shifted to a round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit number of times, and in each round game, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed once in a short time mode. is done. Further, in the result of the small hit, the mode is changed from the round number regulation mode to the opening/closing number regulation mode, and the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened/closed 15 times in a short time mode. In other words, when any of the non-explicit high-probability jackpot result, the explicit high-probability jackpot result, and the small hit result occurs, the operation mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is visually the same. In addition, in the game round when these game results are obtained, different stop results are displayed in the special figure display portion 37a, but the symbol display in which the display area is set larger than the special figure display portion 37a. The stop result is displayed in a manner that makes it indistinguishable on the device 41 . Specifically, in any of the game results, the symbol display device 41 stops and displays a common symbol combination (for example, "3, 4, 1") on any of the activated lines.

In this case, the non-explicit high-probability big win result and small win result are in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and at least in the situation where the predetermined number of game rounds have not been completed after the opening and closing execution mode. Otherwise, the mode of presentation in the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 also becomes a mode in which it is impossible to identify which game result it is. As a result, in the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, when the opening/closing execution mode, which is the low-frequency winning mode, or the opening/closing execution mode, which is the opening/closing number regulation mode, occurs, the player can select the opening/closing execution mode. After the end of the game, the game is played while expecting the transition to the high-probability mode, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In low-probability jackpot results and advantageous jackpot results A to C, the mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which round games are performed with 15 times as the upper limit, and in each round game, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed once in a long-time mode. done. In other words, when one of the low-probability jackpot results and the advantageous jackpot results A to C is obtained, the operation mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the open/close execution mode is visually the same. In addition, in the game round when these game results are obtained, different stop results are displayed in the special figure display portion 37a, but the symbol display in which the display area is set larger than the special figure display portion 37a. The stop result is displayed in a manner that makes it indistinguishable on the device 41 . Specifically, in any of the above game results, the symbol display device 41 stops and displays the same symbol combination on any of the activated lines. In addition, when these game results are obtained, the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 in the open/close execution mode also make it impossible to identify the game result. Furthermore, when these game results are obtained, after the opening/closing execution mode, regardless of the type of support mode before the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode is entered. As a result, when the opening/closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs, the player plays the game expecting that the high-probability mode will be entered after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the game ends for a longer period of time. The game is played while expecting the transition to the high-probability mode of the reference number of times, and the interest in the game is improved.

The number of end criteria for the high-frequency support mode is set more in the case of the low-probability jackpot result than in the cases of the advantageous jackpot results A-C. As a result, even if the transition to the high probability mode does not occur despite the opening and closing execution mode of the high frequency winning mode, the high frequency support mode will be the longest, so if the result is a low probability jackpot It is possible to suppress the disadvantageous feeling of the player.

In addition, if the non-explicit high-probability jackpot result or the explicit high-probability jackpot result that will shift to the opening and closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode results, the end criterion number of times of the high-probability mode is the highest advantageous jackpot result The same number of times as in A is chosen. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of the non-explicit high-probability jackpot result and the explicit high-probability jackpot result.

In the distribution table, as shown in FIG. 9, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 49", "0 to 9" correspond to low probability jackpot results, and "10 to 14" are non- It corresponds to the explicit high probability jackpot result, "15 to 19" corresponds to the explicit high probability jackpot result, "20 to 29" corresponds to the advantageous jackpot result A, "30 to 39" is It corresponds to the advantageous jackpot result B, and "40 to 49" corresponds to the advantageous jackpot result C.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁The expected effect is a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 41 capable of displaying symbols in a variable manner, and in a game cycle that results in a predetermined big win, the final stop result is the award corresponding result. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the grant correspondence result in the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display is started in . Concretely, a combination of symbols having the same number on any of the activated lines is stopped and displayed for the award correspondence result.

There are two types of expectation effects: a ready-to-win display and an advance notice display for expecting the occurrence of the ready-to-win display and the occurrence of the grant correspondence result in a stage before the occurrence of the ready-to-win display.

In the ready-to-win display, a combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. It includes a display state in which symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row. In addition, in a state in which the combinations of ready-to-win patterns are displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to produce a ready-to-win effect. , a combination of ready-to-win patterns is reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface G to perform a ready-to-win effect.

In the advance notice display, after the start of the variable display of the symbols on the display surface G of the symbol display device 41, the symbols are variably displayed in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or in some of the symbol rows. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode is included in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In addition, it also includes a background screen in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and a pattern in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such an advance notice display can occur in any game cycle when the reach display is performed or when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The ready-to-win display is executed regardless of the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 in game rounds in which the same combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Also, in the game rounds corresponding to the big winning result and the small winning result in which the combination of the same symbol is not stopped and displayed, the game is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, in the game round corresponding to the result of losing, when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 63 corresponds to the generation of the reach display. is executed.

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to perform the advance notice display is made not by the main controller 60 but by the sound emission control device 80 . In this case, in the sound emission control device 80, the game round corresponding to either the big win result or the small win result is more likely to cause the notice display than the game round corresponding to the losing result, and the appearance rate To execute lottery processing for advance notice display so as to satisfy at least one condition that low advance notice display is likely to occur. Incidentally, the result of the lottery is reflected when the symbol display device 41 executes an effect for a game cycle.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used to determine the display duration in the special figure display section 37a and the display duration of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 in the MPU 62. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the special figure display unit 37a and at the start of variation in the design by the design display device 41.

<Regarding the processing configuration of the main MPU 62>
Next, each process executed to progress the game by the main MPU 62 will be described. The processing of the main MPU 62 can be roughly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 4 msec in this embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits until 1 second elapses after the main process is activated without proceeding to the next process. In subsequent step S102, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the main MPU 62 is set.

After that, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 78 is manually operated. determine whether or not there is In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed, and in the following step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved at the time of power shutdown, that is, the validity of the stored data is checked. judge.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall starts operating, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on the occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, as initialization of the main RAM 64, the main RAM 64 is cleared. After that, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is performed without executing the processing of step S108 on the condition that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. proceed to In step S109, power-on setting processing is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main side RAM 64 is set to an initial value such as initialization of a power failure flag, and a command corresponding to the current game state is sent to the sound emission control device 80 in order to recognize the current game state. Send to

After that, the process proceeds to the remaining processes of steps S110 to S113. In other words, although the MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a residual time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps S110 to S113 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly.

In the remaining process, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S112, a fluctuation counter update process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read out from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 64, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. After that, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from a state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 62 will be described. The main control board 61 is provided with a clock circuit as pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle. A circuit is provided.

The frequency dividing circuit functions as frequency changing means for changing the period of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the activation timing of the timer interrupt processing by the main MPU 62. . That is, a pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 62 at intervals of 4 msec, which is a specific period. The main MPU 62 executes a process of confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as rising or falling of the pulse signal, and activates the timer interrupt process under at least one condition that the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed. to run.

In this case, if the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in a situation where activation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer Interrupt processing is activated. In other words, depending on the execution status of processing in the main MPU 62, the next timer interrupt processing may be started after 4.1 msec has passed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started. The next timer interrupt process is started after 3.9 msec has passed since the immediately preceding timer interrupt process was started.

However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed at a specific period such as 4 msec regardless of the contents of the process in the main MPU 62, the timer interrupt process is basically started at a specific period. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 62 is such that even if timer interrupt processing at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started, The timer interrupt processing at the timing of 1 absorbs the amount exceeding the specific cycle, and the timer interrupt processing at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

Now, in the timer interrupt process, a power failure information storage process is first executed in step S201. In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is specified, the power failure process is executed.

In subsequent step S202, random number update processing for lottery is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read out from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric role release counter C4, and the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information was executed. Afterwards, a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value.

After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

In subsequent step S205, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred. In the fraud detection process, the game stop flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1" by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred.

In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes after step S207 are executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when information is set to switch the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state, the output of the drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34b is started to switch to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S208, read processing is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the subsequent step S209, winning detection processing is executed. In the winning detection process, signals received from the winning detection sensors 66a to 66e are read, and signals to the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 Execute processing to identify the presence or absence of a ball entry.

In the subsequent step S210, a timer update process is executed for collectively updating numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 64. FIG. In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are collectively handled. may be configured.

In the subsequent step S211, a launch control process for controlling the launch of game balls is executed. In a situation where the shooting operation is continued with respect to the shooting operation device 28, one game ball is shot at the predetermined shooting cycle of 0.6 sec, as already explained.

In the following step S212, as an input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process of step S208, disconnection confirmation of each of the winning detection sensors 66a to 66e and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed. conduct.

In the subsequent step S213, a special figure special electric control process for performing execution control of the game times and execution control of the opening/closing execution mode is executed. The processing contents of the special figure special electric control processing will be described later in detail.

In continuing step S214, normal figure normal electric control processing is performed. In the general/universal electric control process, when a prize to the through gate 35 is generated, a process for acquiring numerical information of the general/universal electric role item open counter C4 is executed, and the numerical information is stored. In the case, open determination is performed for the numerical information, and processing for performing the production for the normal map in the normal map display unit 38a is executed with the open determination as a trigger. Moreover, based on the result of open determination, the process which opens and closes the universal electrical accessory 34a of the 2nd operation|movement opening 34 is performed.

In the subsequent step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, setting the output information for reflecting the increase or decrease number of pending information pertaining to the special figure display unit 37a to the special figure pending display unit 37b, and general Output information is set to reflect the increase/decrease number of the reserved information related to the figure display section 38a in the normal figure reserved display section 38b. Further, in step S216, based on the processing results of step S213 and step S214 immediately before, along with setting the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 37a, the display content of the normal figure display unit 38a Set the output information for updating.

In the subsequent step S216, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and payout state reception processing for performing processing corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. Also, in step S217, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed. In subsequent step S218, an external information setting process is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt process.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after the processing of steps S207 to S218 is executed, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Special special train control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control processing executed in step S213 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12) of the main side MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special figure special electric control process, when the winning to the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 has occurred, the processing for acquiring the pending information is executed, and when the pending information is stored A decision is made on the pending information, and the decision is used as a trigger to execute a process for performing an effect for the game cycle. In addition, based on the result of the success/failure determination, a process for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is executed after the effect for the game round, and a process during the opening/closing execution mode and at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

Specifically, first, in step S301, a hold information acquisition process is executed. In the acquisition process, when the winning of the game ball to the first operation opening 33 occurs or when the winning of the game ball to the second operation opening 34 occurs, the reservation area of the reservation storage area 64a Read the number of pending information stored in RE, when the number of pending information is less than the upper limit (specifically "4"), hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 are stored in the highest-order area in which the reservation information is not stored in the reservation area RE.

In the acquisition process, when the hold information is acquired, a hold command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 . The sound and light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the received hold command to the display side MPU 92 . The display side MPU 92 receives the pending command, and changes the display of the number of pending information on the pattern display device 41 so as to correspond to the increase in the pending number. Further, when the number of pending information increases as described above, the display content is changed to correspond to the increase in the number of pending items in the display control processing of step S215 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12). control is performed.

In subsequent step S302, the information of the special special electric counter provided in the main side RAM64 is read, and in step S303, the special special electric address table stored in the main side ROM63 is read. Then, in step S304, the start address corresponding to the information of the special special electric counter is obtained from the special electric special electric address table.

Here, the processing contents of steps S302 to S304 will be described.

As already explained, the special figure special electric control process includes a process for controlling the effect for the game cycle and a process for controlling the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, as processing for controlling the effect for the game round, special figure fluctuation start processing (step S306), which is a process for starting the effect for the game round, and for advancing the effect for the game round Special figure fluctuation process (step S307), which is the process of , and special figure determination process (step S308), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, are set.

Further, as processing for controlling the opening/closing execution mode, special electric start processing (step S309) which is processing for controlling the opening of the opening/closing execution mode, and processing for controlling the open state of the special electric prize winning device 32. special electric open process (step S310), special electric closed process (step S311) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric prize winning device 32, the ending of the opening and closing execution mode, and the end of the opening and closing execution mode A special electric end process (step S312), which is a process for controlling the transition of the game state, is set.

In such a processing configuration, the special special electric counter is a counter for the main side MPU 62 to grasp which of the plurality of types of processing should be executed, and in the special special electric address table, The start address of the program for executing the above multiple types of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the special special electric counter.

In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure fluctuation start process (step S306), and the start address SA1 is the program for executing the special figure fluctuation process (step S307). It is a start address, the start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the processing during special figure determination (step S308), and the start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric start processing (step S309) The start address SA4 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric open process (step S310), and the start address SA5 is the program start address for executing the special electric closed process (step S311). The start address, the start address SA6, is the start address of the program for executing the special electric end processing (step S312).

When the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed, the special special electric counter is triggered by the fact that the conditions for updating the numerical information are satisfied, and the special special electric control in the next processing time It is incremented by 1, decremented by 1, or cleared to "0" in correspondence with the processing executed in the processing. Therefore, in the special figure special electric control processing in each processing time, the processing corresponding to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric counter should be executed. In addition, the special figure special electric counter is set to 0 as an initial value.

After executing the process of step S304, in step S305, the process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S304 is executed. Specifically, when the acquired start address is SA0, it jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process of step S306, and when the acquired start address is SA1, it jumps to the special figure fluctuation process of step S307. , If the acquired start address is SA2, it jumps to the special figure fixing process of step S308, and if the acquired start address is SA3, it jumps to the special electric start process of step S309, and the acquired start address is If it is SA4, it jumps to the special electric open process of step S310, and if the acquired start address is SA5, it jumps to the special electric closed process of step S311, and if the acquired start address is SA6. It jumps to special electric end processing of step S312. When one of the processes of step S306 to step S312 is executed, this special figure special electric control process is ended. The processing of steps S306 to S312 will be individually described below.

<Special figure fluctuation start processing>
First, the special figure fluctuation start processing of step S306 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S401, it is determined whether or not suspension information is stored in the suspension storage area 64a. When the negative determination is made in step S401, this special figure fluctuation start process is terminated as it is, and when the affirmative determination is made in step S401, the process proceeds to step S402.

In step S402, data setting processing is executed. In the data setting process, the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in each of the reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of the reservation area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of reserved area RE2→first reserved area RE1, third reserved area RE3→second reserved area RE2, fourth reserved area RE4→third reserved area RE3. At this time, a configuration may be adopted in which a shift-time command for making the sound emission control device 80 recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted is set as an output target and transmitted.

In the subsequent step S403, the success/failure determination process is executed. In the success/failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the high-probability mode, the success/failure table for the high-probability mode provided in the main-side ROM 63 is referred to, and among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for success/failure determination, that is, the winning random number counter C1 is acquired. It is determined whether or not the obtained numerical information matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability. In the case of the low-probability mode, the success/failure table for the low-probability mode provided in the main ROM 63 is referred to, and numerical information obtained from the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is used for the low-probability mode. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot numerical information.

In the following step S404, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination process in step S403 is a jackpot winning result. In the case of a jackpot winning result, distribution determination processing is executed in step S405. In the distribution determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, information for distribution determination, that is, numerical information obtained from the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Then, referring to the distribution table provided in the main ROM 63, it specifies which jackpot result the numerical information of the grasped jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to. Specifically, it specifies which one of the low-probability jackpot result, non-explicit high-probability jackpot result, explicit high-probability jackpot result, and advantageous jackpot results A to C corresponds.

In the subsequent step S406, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game round related to the start of this fluctuation is obtained from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the main ROM 63. The specified information is stored in the main side RAM 64 . In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the form of the pattern stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a is set differently for each type of jackpot result.

Information on the type of symbols to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this case, the picture patterns may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of picture patterns may be set for each jackpot result.

In subsequent step S407, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed. Specifically, the main RAM 64 is provided with flags corresponding to the types of each jackpot result, and in step S407, among the flags corresponding to the types of jackpot results, Set the corresponding flag to "1".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S404 that the winning result is not a jackpot winning result, it is determined in step S408 whether or not the result of the success/failure determination process in step S403 is a small winning result. When it is a small hit result, in step S409, stop result setting processing for a small hit result is executed. Specifically, the information of the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in this game round is specified from the stop result table for the small hit result stored in advance in the main side ROM 63, The specified information is stored in the main RAM 64 . The information on the form of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the form of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result. In the subsequent step S410, the small hit flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1".

If a negative determination is made in step S408, then in step S411 a stop result setting process for the deviation result is executed. Specifically, the information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game round corresponding to the start of this fluctuation is stored in the main side ROM 63 in advance. , and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 64 . In this case, the information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the big win result and the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the small win result.

After any one of steps S407, S410 and S411 is executed, display duration acquisition processing is executed in step S412. The acquisition processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 15 .

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not both the high probability counter and the high frequency counter provided in the main RAM 64 are 1 or more. The high-probability counter is a counter for specifying the number of continuous games in the high-probability mode by the main side MPU 62, and when the high-probability counter is 1 or more, the win-fail judgment table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the win-fail judgment process. be done. In addition, when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the big win ends, the high-probability counter is set with data corresponding to the end reference number of times for the high-probability. The data is updated so that the reference count is decremented by one. Then, when the end reference number of times for the high probability becomes "0", the winning lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. The high frequency counter is a counter for specifying the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode by the main side MPU 62, and when the high frequency counter is 1 or more, the high frequency support mode for the high frequency support mode is Processing is performed. In addition, when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the big win ends, the high-frequency counter is set with data corresponding to the end reference number of times for high-frequency use. The data is updated so that the reference count is decremented by one. Then, when the end reference number of times for high frequency becomes "0", the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S501, the first table stored in the main ROM 63 is selected in step S502. The first table is table data in which a plurality of display durations of game rounds in the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are defined. Then, in step S503, acquisition of the value of the variation type counter CS, reading of the number of pending information stored in the pending storage area 64a, and grasping of various lottery results are performed. As for grasping the various lottery results, the content of whether the result of the lottery is a big win result, a small win result, or a losing result, and in the case of a big win result, the content of the type of the big win result, And, in the case of an outlier result, the content of whether or not to generate a reach display is included. In addition, when determining whether or not to generate a reach display in the case of an out result, the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information that triggered the execution of the current game cycle is referred to. In the subsequent step S504, the display duration data corresponding to the various data specified in step S503 is read out from the first table and set as the display duration of the current game cycle. After that, the acquisition process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S505 whether or not the value of the high frequency counter is 1 or more. When an affirmative determination is made in step S505, the second table stored in the main ROM 63 is selected in step S506. The second table is table data in which a plurality of display durations of game rounds in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are defined. Then, in step S503, acquisition of the value of the variation type counter CS, reading of the number of pending information stored in the pending storage area 64a, and grasping of various lottery results are performed. In the subsequent step S504, the display duration data corresponding to the various data specified in step S503 is read out from the second table and set as the display duration of the current game cycle. After that, the acquisition process is terminated.

A shorter display duration is more likely to be selected in the first table and the second table than when other tables for display duration are referred to. Specifically, when the current game round corresponds to any one of the big win result, the small win result and the winning reach display, the corresponding display continuation time is selected. On the other hand, if the number of pieces of reservation information stored in the reservation area RE is 1 or more in a game round that results in a loss that does not cause a ready-to-win display, it is displayed in a game round that results in a loss in which the ready-to-win display does not occur. A display duration shorter than the average display duration ( For example, 2 sec or 3 sec) is selected, and even if the hold information is not stored in the hold area RE, another table for the display duration is referenced in the game turn that results in no ready-to-win display. A display continuation time (for example, 6 sec or 7 sec) shorter than the display continuation time selected when no hold information is stored in the hold area RE is selected. By selecting the display continuation time as described above, in the situation of the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to complete the game round in a short time, shortening the time required until the next big win result occurs. becomes possible.

Further, the first table and the second table have different display durations to be selected when the ready-to-win display occurs, or different display durations that are likely to be selected when the ready-to-win display occurs. Specifically, in the case of the first table, the display duration is longer in the case where the ready-to-win display occurs so that the ready-to-win display of the content with a higher expectation of the big win result is more likely to occur than in the case of the second table. are more likely to be selected. However, it is not limited to this, and the ready-to-win display is generated so that the ready-to-win display of the content with high expectation of the big win result is more likely to occur in the case of the second table than in the case of the first table. A configuration may be adopted in which a long display duration is likely to be selected in some cases.

If a negative determination is made in step S505, it is determined in step S507 whether or not one of the high-probability counter and the after-small-hit counter provided in the main RAM 64 is 1 or more. The after-small-hit counter is a counter for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the standard number of games for after-small-hit results have already been completed after a small-hit result. When the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the small win ends, the counter after the small win is set with data corresponding to the standard number of times after the small win, and every time the game cycle ends, the standard after the small win is set. The data is updated so that the count is decremented by one. Further, when the opening/closing execution mode is shifted, the value of the post-small hit counter is cleared to "0". In the step S507, it is a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode, or in a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, after the result of the small hit, the game times of the standard number of times after the small hit are digested. If the status is not completed, affirmative determination is made.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S507, the third table stored in the main ROM 63 is selected in step S508. The third table is a high probability mode and low frequency support mode, and a low probability mode and low frequency support mode. This is table data in which a plurality of types of display continuation times of game rounds in a state in which the player is not playing is defined. Then, in step S503, as already described, obtain the value of the variation type counter CS, read the number of pending information stored in the pending storage area 64a, and grasp various lottery results, and step S504 , the display duration data corresponding to the various data identified in step S503 is read from the third table and set as the display duration of the current game round. After that, the acquisition process is terminated.

In either the situation of high probability mode and low frequency support mode, or the situation of low probability mode and low frequency support mode and after the result of small winning, the standard number of game rounds for after small winning have not been completed. Also, by referring to the common third table, the selection of the display continuation time of the game cycle is performed in a common manner in these situations. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to identify which of these situations is present from the aspect of the game round, and the player expects to be in the high-probability mode in this situation while playing the game. will do. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved.

If a negative determination is made in step S507, another table stored in the main ROM 63 is selected in step S509. Then, in step S503, as already described, obtain the value of the variation type counter CS, read the number of pending information stored in the pending storage area 64a, and grasp various lottery results, and step S504 , the display duration data corresponding to the various data identified in step S503 is read out from other tables and set as the display duration of the current game cycle. After that, the acquisition process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 14), after executing the acquisition process of the display duration in step S412, the process proceeds to step S413, the information of the display duration acquired in step S412, Set in the figure special electric timer counter. The numerical information set in the timer counter is updated by the timer update process (FIG. 12) already described. By the way, as an effect for the game cycle, the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a and the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 are performed. is displayed (in the symbol display device 41, a predetermined combination of symbols is waiting on the activated line), the final stop is displayed for the final stop time. In this case, the display continuation time acquired in step S412 is the time obtained by subtracting the final stop time from the total time for one game.

In the following step S414, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound and light side MPU82. The variation command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the pass/fail judgment process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution judgment process, and display duration time. Corresponding data are included. Specifically, the upper 4-bit data of the 2-byte data sets identification data for indicating that the command itself is a variation command, and the following 4-bit data is used to perform correctness determination processing. And lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process are set, and time data corresponding to the display duration is set by the remaining 8-bit data. Therefore, when the sound and light side MPU 82 receives a command for variation, it recognizes that it is a command for variation from the identification data, and obtains the result of the winning/failure determination process and the result of the distribution determination process from the lottery result data. Then, the display duration of the current game round is recognized from the time data. Here, since the main MPU 62 selects a different display continuation time depending on whether reach occurs or not, even if the variation command does not include information on whether or not reach occurs, the sound and light MPU 82 displays It is possible to identify the presence or absence of reach from the duration information. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not reach occurs. Note that the variation command may include information that directly indicates the presence or absence of reach occurrence.

The type command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the pass/fail determination process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process, and the rest of the high probability mode. Data corresponding to the number of continuations and the remaining number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode are included. Specifically, the upper 4-bit data of the 2-byte data sets identification data for indicating that the command itself is a type command. The lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set, and the remaining 8-bit data is the data for the number of continuations corresponding to the remaining number of continuations in the high probability mode and the remaining number of continuations in the high frequency support mode. is set. Therefore, when the sound and light side MPU 82 receives a type command, it recognizes that it is a type command from the identification data, and recognizes the result of the winning/failure determination process and the result of the allocation determination process from the lottery result data. , the remaining number of continuations in the high-probability mode and the remaining number of continuations in the high-frequency support mode are recognized from the data for the number of continuations.

Here, both the variation command and the type command include data corresponding to the result of the win/loss determination process and the result of the distribution determination process. Therefore, in the sound and light side MPU 82, by collating the lottery result data included in the variation command and the lottery result data included in the type command, noise, etc., is eliminated with respect to the reception of the variation command and the type command. It becomes possible to specify whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred. Then, when both of the lottery result data match, the effect control corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command is executed, and when both of the lottery result data do not match, can notify it. Incidentally, in the latter case, the sound and light side MPU 82 may execute a game round effect corresponding to the communication abnormality in the game round. Regardless of the result of the processing, the symbol combination corresponding to the complete failure may be stop-displayed on the symbol display device 41 without fail. In this case, the game cycle effect may be configured to be performed for the display duration corresponding to the time data included in the variation command, and may be configured to continue until the next variation command and type command are received. good too.

After performing the process of step S414, the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display part 37a is started in step S415. In the following step S416, 1 is added to the special figure special electric counter. In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is "0", when the process of step S416 is performed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1 ”. After that, after executing the external output process at the time of fluctuation start in step S417, this special figure fluctuation start process is ended. The content of the external output processing at the start of fluctuation will be described later.

<Process during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the processing during special figure fluctuation of step S307 in the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 13) will be described.

In the special figure fluctuation processing, it is determined whether or not it is the timing before the final stop display during the duration of the game round, and if it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the pattern in the special figure display section 37a is changed. Execute processing for regular change. This regular change continues until the timing for starting the final stop display. Also, this regular change is performed in a fixed manner regardless of whether a winning result is obtained and whether a ready-to-win indication occurs.

In addition, instead of waiting in the special figure fluctuation process until the timing of the final stop display, if it is not the time to display the final stop, after executing the process for changing regularly, this special figure Terminate the process during fluctuation. Therefore, after the effect for the game round is started, the special figure fluctuation process is started each time the special figure special electric control process is started until the timing of the final stop display. In addition, when it is time to display the final stop, in order to display the final stop result of the current game round on the symbol display device 41, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82, and a special figure is displayed. The display mode of the pattern on the display section 37a is set to the display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round. Also, the information of the final stop time (0.5 sec) of the game round is read from the main side ROM 63 and set to the special special electric train timer counter. Then, by adding 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter, the value of the counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation process to the one corresponding to the special figure determination process.

<Processing during special figure confirmation>
Next, the process during special figure determination in step S308 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the final stop time of the current game round has elapsed. When a negative determination is made in step S601, the process during this special figure determination is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S601, the process proceeds to step S602.

In step S602, external output processing at the end of fluctuation is executed. Details of the processing will be described later. After that, in step S603, a counter subtraction process is executed. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing counter subtraction processing.

In the counter subtraction process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the value of the high probability counter of the main RAM 64 is 1 or more. If the determination in step S701 is affirmative, the value of the high-probability counter is decremented by 1 in step S702, and it is determined in step S703 whether or not the value of the high-probability counter after the subtraction is "0". do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the high-probability end flag provided in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" in step S704. The high-probability end flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 62 that the winning/failure lottery mode will shift from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S701 or step S703, or if the process of step S704 is executed, it is determined in step S705 whether or not the value of the high-frequency counter in the main RAM 64 is 1 or more. do. If a negative determination is made in step S705, this counter subtraction process is terminated. If the determination in step S705 is affirmative, the value of the high frequency counter is decremented by 1 in step S706, and it is determined in step S707 whether or not the value of the high frequency counter after the subtraction is "0". do. If a negative determination is made in step S707, this counter subtraction process is terminated. When an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the high frequency end flag provided in the main RAM 64 is set to "1" in step S708. The high-frequency end flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 62 that the support mode will shift from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the description of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16), after executing the counter subtraction process in step S603, in step S604, the result of the win/loss determination that triggered the game round this time is a big hit result or a small It is determined whether or not it is a winning result.

If a negative determination is made in step S604, mode transition processing is executed in step S605. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing mode transition processing.

In the mode transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not both the high-probability end flag and the high-frequency end flag of the main RAM 64 are set to "1". If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, then in step S802, an explicit high-precision state end command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82. FIG. As a result, the sound and light side MPU 82 can specify that the state of the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode has ended, and the contents of the presentation can be made to correspond thereto. In the subsequent step S803, external output setting processing at the end of the explicit high-precision state is executed. The contents of the external output setting process will be described later. After that, in step S804, after both the high-probability end flag and the high-frequency end flag of the main RAM 64 are cleared to "0", this mode transition processing ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, it is determined in step S805 whether or not the high-probability end flag of the main RAM 64 is set to "1". If an affirmative determination is made in step S805, it means that the state of the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode is terminated, and the state is shifted to the state of the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode. . In this case, in step S806, after the high-probability end flag is cleared to "0", the mode transition processing is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S805, it is determined in step S807 whether or not the high frequency end flag of the main RAM 64 is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S807, this mode transition processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S807, the state of the low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode ends, It means transitioning to a state of low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode. In this case, the process proceeds to step S808.

In step S808, a high-frequency state termination command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82. FIG. As a result, the sound and light side MPU 82 can specify that the state of the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode has ended, and the content of the effect can be made to correspond to it. In the subsequent step S809, external output setting processing at the end of the high frequency state is executed. The contents of the external output setting process will be described later. After that, in step S810, after the high frequency end flag of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0", this mode transition processing is ended.

Returning to the description of the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 16), after executing the mode transition process at step S605, after clearing the value of the special figure special electric counter at step S606 to "0", this special figure is being decided End the process. As a result, the special figure fluctuation start process is executed in the next special figure special electric control process.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S604, the process advances to step S607 to read information on the opening time (for example, 4 seconds) pre-stored in the main-side ROM 63, and in step S608, the information on the opening time is read. Set the special special electric timer counter. Incidentally, the opening time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the following step S609, an opening command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU82. The opening command is a command for making the sound/light side MPU 82 recognize that it is time to start the opening/closing execution mode effect. The opening command also includes information indicating whether the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode is one of various big win results and small win results. Therefore, the sound and light side MPU 82 can execute the effect of the opening/closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode.

In the following step S610, 1 is added to the special figure special electric counter. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electric counter is "2" when the special figure confirmation processing is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter is "3" when the processing of step S610 is performed. Become.

After that, in step S611, after executing the external output setting process at the start of the bonus, the process during this special figure determination is terminated. The contents of the external output setting process at the start of the bonus will be described later.

<Special electric start processing>
Next, the special electric power start processing of step S309 in the special electric power control processing (FIG. 13) will be described.

In the special electric start processing, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the opening and closing execution mode of this time has passed, and if it has passed, it is determined whether the execution trigger of the opening and closing execution mode of this time is any of the jackpot results. judge. In the case of any jackpot result, 15 is set in the round counter provided in the main RAM 64 and 10 is set in the winning counter provided in the main RAM 64 . The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the main MPU 62 in the opening/closing execution mode, and the winning counter is the upper limit number of game balls in one round game or one opening/closing number regulation mode. is a counter for the main side MPU 62 to specify whether or not a prize has been won. Then, the opening continuation time corresponding to the jackpot result is set in the special electric power timer counter, and the special power winning device 32 is put in the open state. Moreover, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is set to the open state, an open command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 . By receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 executes control for switching the effect in the opening/closing execution mode accordingly.

When the opening/closing execution mode of this time is triggered by the result of a small hit, 15 is set to the opening/closing counter provided in the main side RAM 64, and 10 is set to the winning counter. The opening/closing counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to specify the number of times the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened/closed in the opening/closing execution mode of the opening/closing number regulation mode. Then, the opening continuation time corresponding to the result of the small hit is set in the special electric special electric timer counter, and the special electric winning device 32 is put in the open state. Moreover, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is set to the open state, an open command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 .

Regardless of whether the result of a big win or the result of a small win is used as a trigger, after the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened, 1 is added to the special electric electric counter and the special electric start processing is finished. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special electric start processing is executed is "3", it becomes "4" after adding 1.

<Processing during opening of the special train>
Next, the special electric open processing of step S310 in the special electric special electric control processing (FIG. 13) will be described.

In the special electric open processing, if the current open/close execution mode is the round number regulation mode, it is determined whether or not the end condition of the round game of 1 is satisfied, and if the end condition is satisfied The special electric prize winning device 32 is closed, and a closing command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 . In addition, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter after subtracting 1 is "0", and if it is not "0", the closing time is set to the special special electric timer counter. The closing time is constant irrespective of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and is specifically set to 1 sec, which is longer than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Also, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed, regardless of whether the value of the round counter is "0" or not, 1 is added to the special electric special electric counter. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special electric open processing is executed is "4", it becomes "5" after adding 1.

When the current opening/closing execution mode is the opening/closing number regulation mode, if the opening continuation time of the special electric prize winning device 32 has passed, the special electric prize winning device 32 is put in the closed state, and the closing command is sent to the sound and light side MPU 82. Send to Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the open/close counter after subtracting 1 is "0", and if it is not "0", the closing time is set to the special special electric timer counter. As already described, the closing time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Also, when the open duration time has not elapsed, it is determined whether or not a prize has been awarded to the special electric prize winning device 32, and when a prize has been awarded, the prize counter is decremented by one. Then, when the value of the winning counter after subtracting 1 is "0", the open/close counter is cleared to "0" and the special electric winning device 32 is closed. Also, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed, the special electric special electric counter is incremented by 1 regardless of whether or not the value of the open/close counter is "0". In this case, since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special electric open processing is executed is "4", it becomes "5" after adding 1.

<Treatment during special train closure>
Next, the processing during special electric closing of step S311 in special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 13) is demonstrated.

In the special electric closing process, it is determined whether or not both the round counter and the open/close counter are "0". If either one is not "0", it is determined whether or not the closing time has elapsed. If the closing time has not passed, this special electric closing process is terminated as it is, and if the closing time has passed, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened, and the opening and closing execution mode of this time is executed. Set the opening duration corresponding to the winning result to the special special electric timer counter. Moreover, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is set to the open state, an open command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 . After that, after subtracting 1 from the special figure special electric counter, this special electric closing processing is terminated. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special electric closed processing is executed is "5", it becomes "4" after subtracting 1.

On the other hand, when both the round counter and the opening/closing counter are "0", the ending command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU82. The ending command is a command for making the sound and light side MPU 82 recognize that it is time to start the ending effect. The ending command also includes information indicating whether the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode is one of various big win results and small win results. Therefore, the sound/light side MPU 82 can execute the ending effect in a manner corresponding to the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. Also, the information of the ending time (for example, 6 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 63 is read, and the information of the ending time is set to the special special electric train timer counter. Incidentally, the ending time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. After that, after adding 1 to the special special electric counter, this special electric closing processing is ended. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special electric closed processing is executed is "5", it becomes "6" after adding 1.

<Special call end processing>
Next, the special electric end processing of step S312 in the special electric special electric control processing (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special call ending process, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed. If the ending time has not passed, the special electric end processing is terminated. When the ending time has passed, the game state transition processing is executed in step S902, the external output setting processing at the end of the bonus is executed in step S903, and the special special electric counter is set to "0" in step S904. ' is cleared, this special electric end processing is terminated.

The external output setting process at the end of the bonus in step S903 will be described later, and the game state transition process in step S902 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether the winning result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode that has ended this time is either the advantageous big winning result A or the advantageous big winning result B. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, a value corresponding to each jackpot result is set in a high probability counter and a high frequency counter of the main RAM 64 in step S1002. Specifically, in the case of the advantageous jackpot result A, both the high probability counter and the high frequency counter are set to "30", and in the case of the advantageous jackpot result B, the high probability counter and the high frequency counter are set. Set both to "50".

If a negative determination is made in step S1001, in step S1003, it is determined whether the hit result that triggered the transition to the opening and closing execution mode ended this time is either the explicit high probability jackpot result or the advantageous jackpot result C. judge. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, "70" is set in each of the high probability counter and the high frequency counter of the main RAM 64 in step S1004.

If a negative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined in step S1005 whether or not the hit result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode that has ended this time is the non-explicit high-probability jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1005, it is determined in step S1006 whether or not the value of the high frequency counter of the main RAM 64 is "0". If the value of the high-frequency counter is 1 or more, "70" is set to both the high-probability counter and the high-frequency counter in step S1004. If the value of the high frequency counter is "0", the high probability counter is set to "70" in step S1007.

If a negative determination is made in step S1005, it is determined in step S1008 whether or not the hit result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode that has ended this time is a low-probability big hit result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1008, the high probability counter is cleared to "0" and the high frequency counter is set to "100" in step S1009.

When the processing of step S1002, step S1004, step S1007 or step S1009 is executed, after executing the external output setting processing at the time of high frequency start in step S1010, this game state transition processing is ended. In the external output setting process, on condition that the value of the high frequency counter is 1 or more, external output of a signal indicating the high frequency support mode is started.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1008, it means that the winning result that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode that ended this time is the small winning result. In this case, in step S1011, the already explained mode transition processing (FIG. 18) is executed. After that, in step S1012, after setting "30" to the post-small hit counter, the game state transition processing is terminated.

<About the processing configuration in the sound and light side MPU 82 and the display side MPU 92>
Next, each process for controlling execution of effects and notifications in the sound and light side MPU 82 and the display side MPU 92 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing of sound and light side MPU 82>
FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed in the sound and light side MPU 82 at a relatively short period (for example, 4 msec).

In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S1101, master-side command storage process is executed. The main side command storage process is a process for storing the command in the sound and light side RAM 84 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 84 is provided with a main side ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the main side ring buffer. As they are stored, they are read out sequentially according to the order in which they were stored.

In the following step S1102, display-side command storage processing is executed. The display side command storage process is a process for storing the command in the sound and light side RAM 84 when a command is received from the display side MPU 92 . The sound and light side RAM 84 is provided with a display side ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the display side MPU 92, and the commands received from the display side MPU 92 are sequentially stored in the display side ring buffer. As they are stored, they are read out sequentially according to the order in which they were stored.

After that, in step S1103, master-side command handling processing for performing processing corresponding to the command received from the master-side MPU 62 is executed. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing master-side command handling processing.

In the master-side command handling process, mode processing is first executed in step S1201. The processing contents of the mode processing will be described later. In the subsequent step S1202, it is determined whether or not the command for variation and the type command have been received from the main MPU 62. If these commands have been received, a game result storage process is executed in step S1203. Specifically, from the information contained in the variation command, the information indicating the results of the win/fail lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main side MPU 62 at the start of the current game cycle is specified, A process of writing the specified information in the sound and light side RAM 84 is executed. During the memory processing, the lottery result data included in the variation command and the lottery result data included in the type command are collated, and communication of these variation commands and type commands is performed normally. It is also possible to determine whether or not communication is abnormal, and to perform notification processing and data storage processing corresponding to the communication abnormality.

In the subsequent step S1204, the advance notice lottery process is executed. In the advance notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not the symbol display device 41 is to perform the advance notice display in the current game round. As described above, such an advance notice display may be performed in a situation in which all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner after the symbol display device 41 starts to variably display the symbols, or in some cases. In a situation in which symbols are displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, the characters are displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or the background screen is changed from the previous aspect. Also includes those in which the patterns on the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are different from the patterns up to that point. The notice display can occur in any game round when the reach display is performed or when the reach display is not performed, but the rate when the reach display is performed is higher than when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. In addition, in the advance notice lottery process, the advance notice display is more likely to occur in the game rounds corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game rounds corresponding to the result of losing, and the advance notice display with a lower appearance rate is more likely to occur. A preliminary lottery will be held.

In the subsequent step S1205, stop symbol determination processing is executed. In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game cycle is either a low-probability jackpot result or an advantageous jackpot result A to C, a stop in which the same pattern combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5. Information corresponding to the result is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, in both the low-probability jackpot results and the advantageous jackpot results A to C, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the combination of the same symbols, and the same combination of even-numbered symbols can be selected. However, the probability of selecting a combination of odd symbols is set higher for the advantageous jackpot results A to C than for the low-probability jackpot result. As a result, when the same combination of odd-numbered symbols is stop-displayed on the symbol display device 41, the player is more likely to shift to the high-probability mode than when the same combination of even-numbered symbols is stop-displayed. It will be expected. The effective lines L1 to L5 on which the same combination of symbols are stop-displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game cycle is an explicit high-probability jackpot result, a non-explicit high-probability jackpot result, or a small hit result, a combination of the same symbols is established on all the activated lines L1 to L5. Information corresponding to the result of stoppage that does not occur and the combination of specific symbols ("3, 4, 1") on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the information of the result of this stoppage. . In this case, the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a loss result, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win display is specified from the content of the variation command. Then, when the ready-to-win display occurs, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbols and the combination of the above-mentioned specific symbols does not hold on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and on one or two of the effective lines L1 to L5 Information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of ready-to-win symbols is established is determined as information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if the ready-to-win display does not occur, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbols and the combination of the above-mentioned specific symbols does not hold on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the ready-to-win display is on all the effective lines L1 to L5. Information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of symbols is not established is determined as information of the current stop result.

In the subsequent step S1206, a process for determining the effect pattern of the current game round is executed. In this process, the information on the display duration of the game cycle is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and the information on the display duration, the information on the game result specified in step S1203 above, and the information on the game result specified in step S1203 above. An effect pattern corresponding to the combination of lottery result information of the advance notice lottery process in S1204 is selected. When selecting the effect pattern, the effect pattern table provided in the sound and light side ROM 83 is referred to.

Here, the effect pattern table will be described with reference to FIG. In the effect pattern table, effect patterns are set in one-to-one correspondence with the types of variation commands and the types of results of the advance notice lottery process in step S1204. Specifically, in the case of the variable command "A111", when the preliminary lottery result is 1, the pseudo-run twice, the A reach, and the A special reach are selected as the effect pattern, and when the preliminary lottery result is 2, As production patterns, one pseudo-run, B reach, A cut-in, and A special reach are selected. Special Reach is selected.

Pseudo-continuation means that all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 start high-speed variation, switch to low-speed variation, and after that, the variation display in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is finished, and a predetermined stop result is obtained. The unit variable production to be displayed is the production performed multiple times during one game. In this case, in the last unit variation performance during one game round, the combination of symbols corresponding to the success/failure determination process and the distribution determination process in the main side MPU 62 is stopped and displayed. A combination of symbols indicating that it is is stopped and displayed. As for the combination of symbols indicating that it is a pseudo group, the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the explicit high-probability big win, the result of the non-explicit high-probability big win, and the result of the small win is stopped-displayed without stopping the combination of the same symbols. Furthermore, the combination of ready-to-win symbols is also a combination that is not stopped and displayed, and is a combination of symbols that makes it possible to recognize that it is a pseudo group. For example, a symbol combination of "3, 5, 7" is stop-displayed on one activated line.

A reach is normal reach that is performed in a situation where A type characters appear, B reach is normal reach that is performed in a situation where B type characters appear, and C reach. is a normal reach performed in a situation where a C-type character appears. A cut-in is an effect in which a cut-in image of a type A character is displayed in a normal reach state. A special reach is a special reach performed in a situation where an A type character appears.

As described above, in response to one variation command transmitted from the main MPU 62, the sound and light MPU 82 can select a plurality of types of effect patterns based on the result of the advance notice lottery process. However, the display continuation time of the entire game cycle is a common display continuation time corresponding to the one variation command for any of the plurality of types of effect patterns that can be selected from these one variation command. As a result, it is possible to execute the effect for the game cycle according to the display duration time determined by the main MPU 62, and while suppressing an excessive increase in the types of variation commands transmitted from the main MPU 62, It is possible to diversify production patterns.

In addition, the effect patterns that can be selected from one variation command have common effect contents that exist in common. Concretely, the variable command of "A111" is common in that a pseudo run occurs and an A special reach occurs. As a result, in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, it becomes easier to design a common display continuation time while allowing a plurality of types of performance patterns to be selected from one variation command.

It should be noted that the configuration in which a plurality of types of effect patterns can be selected from one variation command as described above is the same for other variation commands. While the pattern is configured to be selectable, it is common that C-reach occurs between each production pattern. Further, for example, in the case of a variable command "A113", while a plurality of types of effect patterns can be selected, three pseudo-continuations occur between the respective effect patterns in common.

Returning to the description of the master side command handling process (FIG. 22), after executing the process of step S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, the processing of writing each information of the type of effect pattern selected in step S1206 and the type of stop symbol determined in step S1205 into the sound/light side RAM 84 is executed. In addition, since the effect pattern includes information on the display duration of the current game round, by writing the effect pattern information to the sound and light side RAM 84, not only the effect pattern information but also the display duration information can be obtained. Also, the sound and light side MPU 82 can read again. However, the sound and light side MPU 82 does not measure the display continuation time.

In subsequent step S1208, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step S1205 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step S1206 are transmitted to the display side MPU 92. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S1202, or after the process of step S1208 is executed, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not a final stop command has been received. When the final stop command has been received, the symbol stop command is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1210. The symbol stop command is a command for instructing the display side MPU 92 to wait the stop symbols corresponding to the current game cycle on the effective lines L1 to L5 and maintain the state for the final stop time.

If a negative determination is made in step S1209, or after the process of step S1210 is executed, it is determined in step S1211 whether or not an opening command has been received. If an opening command has been received, then in step S1212 an opening handling process is executed. In the opening corresponding processing, the type of the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode included in the opening command received this time is specified, and the content of the performance in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is determined. process for In subsequent step S1213, an opening command corresponding to the processing result of step S1212 is transmitted to the display side MPU 92. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S1211, or after the processing of step S1213 is executed, it is determined in step S1214 whether or not an open command has been received. When the opening command has been received, in step S1215, the display side MPU 92 recognizes that the opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 has been newly started, that is, the first round game has been newly started. , an open command is transmitted to the display side MPU 92.

If a negative determination is made in step S1214, or after the process of step S1215 has been executed, it is determined in step S1216 whether or not a close command has been received. If the closing command has been received, in step S1217, the display side MPU 92 is notified that the special electric prize winning device 32 has been closed, that is, that one round game has ended. Send a close command.

If a negative determination is made in step S1216, or after the process of step S1217 has been executed, it is determined in step S1218 whether or not an ending command has been received. If the ending command has been received, ending handling processing is executed in step S1219. In the ending handling process, the content of the success/failure lottery mode after the open/close execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, and the processing for determining the contents of the ending effect corresponding to the type of success/failure lottery mode is executed. do. The contents of the ending handling process will be described later in detail. In subsequent step S1220, an ending command corresponding to the processing result of step S1219 is transmitted to the display side MPU 92. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S1218, or after the processing of step S1220 is executed, it is determined in step S1221 whether or not a notification command has been received. The notification command is issued when it is specified in the fraud detection processing of step S205 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12) of the main MPU 62 that a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred. Along with being output, it is also output when it is specified that the gaming machine body 12 or the front door frame 14 is in the open state in the input state monitoring process of step S212. If the notification command has been received, in order to perform the notification, light emission data reading processing is executed in step S1222, and sound output data reading processing is executed in step S1223. As a result, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 is performed and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 is performed in a manner corresponding to the content of the notification command, that is, in a manner corresponding to the event that triggered the output of the notification command. will be After that, in step S1224, a notification command corresponding to the contents of the notification command received this time is transmitted to the display side MPU 92. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S1221, or after the process of step S1224 is executed, it is determined in step S1225 whether or not a release command has been received. The cancellation command is output when it is specified that the state in which a predetermined event has occurred has been canceled in the fraud detection processing of step S205 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12) of the main MPU 62. It is also output when it is specified in the input state monitoring process of step S212 that the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 has changed from the open state to the closed state. If the release command has been received, in step S1226 the light emission data set in step S1222 and the sound output data set in step S1223 are cleared. Thereafter, in step S1227, a release command corresponding to the contents of the release command received this time is transmitted to the display side MPU 92.

If a negative determination is made in step S1225, or if the processing of step S1227 has been executed, other processing is executed in step S1228, and then this master side command processing ends. In other handling processing, for example, it is determined whether or not a demonstration start command has been received, and if a demonstration start command has been received, the demonstration start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 .

Demonstration display means that a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 0.1 sec) for starting a demonstration has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round in a situation where the open/close execution mode is not in progress. , or after the power supply to the main MPU 62 is started or the pachinko machine 10 is reset, a predetermined start waiting period for the start of the demonstration without starting a new game round (for example, 3 sec ) has elapsed, the pattern display device 41 is started. In the demo display, an image is displayed in which the symbols stopped on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are performing a predetermined action, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the symbols are performing a predetermined action. After or instead of displaying the displayed image, a moving image of the manufacturer name, the model name, or a predetermined character may be displayed. In addition, in the configuration in which the demonstration display is performed by animation of the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols that were finally stopped and displayed in the previous game cycle may be used as the symbols. In this case, the demonstration display can be diversified.

<V interrupt processing of display side MPU 92>
Here, the V interrupt processing executed by the display side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle, specifically at a cycle of 20 msec.

When the VDP 95 outputs an image signal for one frame to the pattern display device 41, it starts outputting the image signal from the dot in the upper left corner of the display surface 41a, and extends the horizontal line including the dot at one end. Image signals are sequentially output to the dots arranged side by side, and image signals are sequentially output to the dots from the left to the right for each horizontal line. Finally, an image signal is output for the dot in the lower right corner of the display surface 41a. In this case, the VDP 95 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display side MPU 92 at the timing of outputting the image signal for the last dot, and makes the display side MPU 92 recognize that the update of the image for one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this regard, the V interrupt process can be considered to be activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal has not been received, if 20 msec has passed since the previous V interrupt process was started, a new V interrupt process is started.

In the V interrupt process, command analysis processing is first executed in step S1301. Specifically, the contents of commands stored in the command buffer of the display-side RAM 94 are analyzed. In subsequent step S1302, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received based on the analysis result of step S1301. If a new command has been received, command handling processing is executed in step S1303.

In the command correspondence process, when a stop result command and a pattern command are received, the pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the stop result command and the pattern command is read from the display ROM 93 and written to the display RAM 94 .

The pattern data table is necessary to display one frame of image at each update timing of the image when displaying the animation corresponding to the effect for the current game round on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. It is an information group for which various processing is defined. That is, in the pattern data table, a group of information corresponding to each frame (the frame update cycle is 20 msec) from the start timing to the end timing of the effect for the current game cycle is defined.

The pattern data table will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is an example of a pattern data table that can be selected when the advantageous jackpot result C is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the pattern data table, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the display duration of the target game round is set. information, information on presence/absence of command output, and information on additional data are set.

The information on the content of the task is information set to display the video corresponding to the game round this time, and unless information that does not reflect the information on the content of the task is set as additional data An image corresponding to the information of the content of the task is displayed in the frame. The information about the content of the task includes information about parameters necessary for instructing the drawing to the VDP 95 in order to display an image of one frame at the corresponding update timing.

Specifically, in the pattern data table shown in FIG. 25, data at the start of fluctuation is set in the pointer information "0", and data at the start of the notice effect is set in the pointer information "200". , Data at the end of the notice effect is set in the pointer information of "300", data at the start of the normal reach is set in the pointer information of "400", and data at the start of the super reach is set in the pointer information of "700". data at the start of the fixed effect is set in the pointer information of "1000", and data at the end of the variation is set in the pointer information of "1400". Each of these pieces of pointer information corresponds to delimitation timings such as the start of an effect, the switching of the effect, and the end of the effect. In addition, in the pointer information other than these, data is set to enable moving image display between break timings.

The information on the presence/absence of command output is information indicating whether or not a command is output from the display side MPU 92 to the sound/light side MPU 82 and the type of the command. The display-side MPU 92 outputs a command to the sound and light-side MPU 82 at a predetermined timing according to the content of the moving image, thereby enabling the display light emitting unit 53 to perform light production according to the content of the image, and the speaker unit. At 54, it is made possible to execute the effect of sound output according to the content of the image.

Specifically, in the pattern data table shown in FIG. 25, command data is set for pointer information of "0" in which data at the start of variation is set in the contents of the task. Therefore, at the start of game round variation, based on command transmission from the display side MPU 92 to the sound and light side MPU 82, the sound and light side MPU 82 starts light emission control, sound output control, and the like. Also, in the contents of the task, data at the start of the notice effect, data at the start of normal reach, data at the start of super reach, data at the start of fixed effect, and data at the end of fluctuation are set from each pointer information For the pointer information of the timing before the number of frames (the number of pointers) for advance transmission, specifically, each pointer information of "198", "398", "698", "998", and "1398" , the command data is set. Therefore, the command transmission from the display side MPU 92 to the sound and light side MPU 82 is performed in advance at break timings other than the start of game round variation, and at these break timings, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 and the light emission control are performed. , the content of the sound output control and the drive control of the movable object can be completely synchronized.

The information of the additional data is set as blank as the initial setting of the pattern data table, and the writing process to the additional data is executed when there is an instruction to execute notification. When writing to the additional data is performed, the information written in the additional data has priority over the information originally set in the contents of the task. For example, when additional data corresponding to displaying a predetermined character as an image as notification is set, the image display is such that the character image is added on the image corresponding to the content of the task. done.

In the command response process, when the final stop command is received, the final stop setting process is executed. In the final stop setting process, the data table for statically displaying the stop symbols corresponding to the current game round until the period during the final stop display has passed is read out from the display side ROM 93 and written in the display side RAM 94. Run.

In the command correspondence process, when an opening command is received, an opening data table corresponding to the opening command is read from the display side ROM 93 and written to the display side RAM 94 . The data table for the opening is used to display one frame of image at each update timing of the image when the moving image corresponding to the effect for the current opening/closing execution mode is displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. It is a group of information that defines the processing necessary for The data structure of the opening data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table. In other words, the opening data table contains not only a group of information defining the processing necessary to display one frame of image at each update timing of the image, but also a sound Data for command transmission to the optical side MPU 82 is set. However, in the data table for the opening, the contents of the presentation during each round game and the interval period between the round games are defined from the start of the opening presentation. In this case, the data during the round game is set so that the image of the loop or final update timing is held until the corresponding round game ends, and similarly, the data during the interval is set so that the corresponding interval ends. It is set so that the image of the loop or the final update timing is held until. The range of pointer information to be referred to in the data table for opening is switched according to the reception of the open command or the close command.

In the command response process, when either the open command or the close command is received, the opening/closing setting process is executed. In the opening/closing setting process, the range of pointer information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the content of the received command.

In the command correspondence processing, when an ending command is received, the ending data table corresponding to the ending command is read from the display side ROM 93 and written to the display side RAM 94 . The data table for the ending is necessary for displaying an image of one frame at each update timing of the image when displaying the animation corresponding to the effect for the current ending on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. It is an information group for which various processing is defined. The data structure of the ending data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table. In other words, the data table for the ending contains not only a group of information defining the processing necessary to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image, but also a sound Data for command transmission to the optical side MPU 82 is set.

In the command response process, when the notification command is received, the setting process of the notification data is executed. In the notification data setting process, notification data corresponding to the content of notification included in the current notification command is written as additional data in the currently set data table. As a result, when the image is updated next time, the content of the notification data is reflected, and for example, a character image corresponding to the type of event to be notified is added to the effect image for the game cycle or the effect image for the opening/closing execution mode. .

In the command response process, if a release command has been received, the notification data clear process is executed. In the notification data clearing process, currently, among the notification data set in the additional data of the data table, the notification corresponding to the type of notification target event set as the notification cancellation target in the cancellation command received this time is executed. Execute processing to clear data for As a result, when the image is updated next time, the notification of the type targeted for cancellation is cancelled.

Returning to the description of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 24), if a negative determination is made in step S1302 or after the processing of step S1303 is executed, pointer update processing is executed in step S1304. In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated so as to advance by one frame. This enables the display-side MPU 92 to grasp the processing necessary to display one frame of image corresponding to the update timing of this time.

In the following step S1305, task processing is executed. In task processing, it is determined whether or not additional data exists in the area corresponding to the current pointer information in the data table. If the additional data does not exist, the task data of the current pointer is read from the data table, and according to the read task data, the VDP 95 is instructed to display an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time. Calculation of parameters required for drawing instructions is performed. On the other hand, if additional data exists in the area corresponding to the current pointer information in the data table, it is determined whether or not the additional data is additional data for the image of the task data. If it is additional data, the task data and additional data of the current pointer are read from the data table, and according to the read task data and additional data, to display an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time. , and perform calculation of parameters necessary for giving a drawing instruction to the VDP 95 . If it is not the additional data, the additional data of the current pointer is read from the data table, and a drawing instruction is given to the VDP 95 in order to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time according to the read additional data. Calculation of the parameters necessary for the operation is performed.

After executing the task processing in step S1305, it is determined in step S1306 whether or not command data exists in the command output presence/absence area corresponding to the current pointer information in the data table. If command data exists, it means that it is time to output the command, so command setting processing is executed in step S1307.

In the command setting process, a command indicating that the effect of the game round should be started, a command indicating that the advance notice display should be started, a command indicating that normal reach should be started, a command indicating that super reach should be started, A command indicating that the variation should be terminated, a command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode effect should be started, a command indicating that the effect of the round game should be started, and a command indicating that the effect of the interval between the round games should be started. A command indicating that the ending effect should be started, a command indicating that the demonstration display should be started, etc. are transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 according to respective timings.

If a negative determination is made in step S1306, or if the process of step S1307 has been executed, the drawing list output process is executed in step S1308, and then this V interrupt process ends. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing of this processing is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 95 . In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped by the immediately preceding task processing becomes the drawing target, and the parameter information updated by the task processing is also set. The VDP 95 creates drawing data in the frame area of the video RAM 97 according to this drawing list. The VDP 95 outputs a signal to the pattern display device 41 according to the drawing data created in the frame area. As a result, one frame of image is displayed on the pattern display device 41 .

<Timer interrupt processing of sound and light side MPU 82>
Returning to the description of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 21) of the sound and light side MPU 82, after executing the master side command processing in step S1103, the display side command processing is executed in step S1104. In the display-side command handling process, a process of reading light emission data and sound output data is executed according to the content of the command received from the display-side MPU 92 . As a result, light emission control corresponding to the display content of the pattern display device 41 is executed for the display light emitting portion 53, and sound output control corresponding to the display content of the pattern display device 41 is executed for the speaker portion 54. be.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, when the main side MPU 62 is used as a reference, the sound and light side MPU 82 exists on the upstream side of the communication with respect to the display side MPU 92. waits for the command to be sent before starting execution control of the production. As a result, when the light emission effect, the sound output effect, and the display effect occur in the same period, it becomes difficult for the respective effects to be out of sync. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform an effect using a plurality of types of effect means.

After that, in step S1105, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of the display light emitting unit 53 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 is performed in accordance with the light emission data read out in the master side command correspondence process of step S1103 or the display side command correspondence process of step S1104.

In subsequent step S1106, sound output control processing for controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 54 is executed. In the sound output control process, the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 is performed according to the sound output data read out in the master side command correspondence process of step S1103 or the display side command correspondence process of step S1104. After that, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Effect in pachinko machine 10 for predicting the number of continuations of the high-probability mode>
Next, the content of the effect in the pachinko machine 10 for making the player predict the number of times the high probability mode will continue will be described.

First, the ending command output process executed by the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Incidentally, the ending command output process is executed in the special electric closing process of step S311 in the special electric special electric control process (FIG. 13).

In the ending command output process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether the hit result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is one of the low-probability jackpot results and the advantageous jackpot results AC. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, in step S1402, an ending command corresponding to the big hit result is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU82. Specifically, in the case of a low-probability jackpot result, a first ending command is transmitted, in the case of an advantageous jackpot result A, a second ending command is sent, and in the case of an advantageous jackpot result B, a third ending command is sent. An ending command is transmitted, and in the case of an advantageous jackpot result C, a fourth ending command is transmitted. After that, the ending command output process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401, it is determined in step S1403 whether or not the value of the high-frequency counter is 1 or more, thereby determining whether the open/close execution mode shifted to the high-frequency support mode. determine whether or not In the case of the opening/closing execution mode shifted to the low-frequency support mode, in step S1404, it is determined whether or not the winning result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a small winning result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1404, after transmitting the fifth ending command to the sound and light side MPU 82 in step S1405, this ending command output process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1404, it is determined in step S1406 whether or not the hit result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the non-explicit high-probability big win result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, after transmitting the sixth ending command to the sound and light side MPU 82 in step S1407, this ending command output process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1406, it means that the hit result that triggered the transition to the opening and closing execution mode this time is the result of the explicit high probability jackpot. After transmitting to the MPU 82, this ending command output process is terminated.

In the case of the open/close execution mode shifted to the high frequency support mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1403, and the process proceeds to step S1409. In step S1409, it is determined whether or not the winning result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a small winning result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1409, after transmitting the seventh ending command to the sound and light side MPU 82 in step S1410, this ending command output process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1409, it means that the hit result that triggered the transition to the opening and closing execution mode this time is the explicit high-probability jackpot result or the non-explicit high-probability jackpot result, so in step S1411 After transmitting the eighth ending command to the sound and light side MPU 82, this ending command output process is terminated.

Next, the ending handling process executed by the sound and light side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the ending handling process is executed in step S1219 in the master side command handling process (FIG. 22).

In the ending handling process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not any one of the first to seventh ending commands has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the process advances to step S1502 to read the lottery table corresponding to the received ending command from the sound and light side ROM83. In the following step S1503, lottery processing for the display mode is executed. In the lottery processing of the display mode, numerical information is acquired from a lottery random number counter, which is a counter provided in the sound and light RAM 84 and whose numerical information is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec). The display mode is selected by comparing the information with the lottery table read in step S1502. Then, in step S1504, the selected display mode is set as the future display mode. Note that the ending command corresponding to the display mode set here is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1220 in the main side command correspondence processing (FIG. 22), so that the image corresponding to the set display mode is displayed as a pattern. Display control is performed in the display side MPU 92 so as to be displayed on the display device 41 . After that, this ending correspondence processing is ended.

Here, how the display mode is selected by lottery will be described with reference to FIG. 28 .

The display mode is for informing the player of the degree of expectation that the win/fail lottery mode is the high-probability mode, and of the degree of expectation that the standard number of times for ending the high-probability mode is large. This is the content displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The display corresponding to this display mode is started in the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode, and is continued until a predetermined end condition is satisfied during subsequent game rounds. As the display mode, as shown in FIG. 28, six types of first to sixth display modes are set.

Between the display modes, at least one of the types of symbols displayed in the background screen of the symbol display device 41 and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is different, and the symbol display device 41 indicates that "long continuation or longer" is displayed. A display corresponding to the display mode such as "expectation" is performed. Further, the sound output from the speaker unit 54 may differ between the display modes.

The first to third display modes are display modes selected when the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency support mode. Among the first display mode to the third display mode, the first display mode is a display mode that is likely to be selected when the end criterion count is a high probability mode, and the second display mode is a high probability mode with an intermediate or short termination criterion count. This is the display mode that is likely to be selected when the probability mode is selected, and the third display mode is the display mode that is likely to be selected when the probability mode is the low probability mode.

On the other hand, the fourth to sixth display modes are display modes selected when the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode. Among the fourth display mode to the sixth display mode, the fourth display mode is a display mode that is likely to be selected when the high probability mode is selected, and the fifth display mode has a high probability mode and a low probability when it appears. The sixth display mode is a display mode that is likely to be selected in the low-probability mode.

When the first ending command is received, that is, when a low-probability jackpot result is obtained, the first lottery table is selected. In this case, the selectivity of the first display mode is 5%, the selectivity of the second display mode is 10%, and the selectivity of the third display mode is 85%. When the second ending command is received, that is, when the advantageous jackpot result A is obtained, the second lottery table is selected. In this case, the selectivity of the first display mode is 15%, the selectivity of the second display mode is 60%, and the selectivity of the third display mode is 25%. When the third ending command is received, that is, when the advantageous jackpot result B is obtained, the third lottery table is selected. In this case, the selectivity of the first display mode is 30%, the selectivity of the second display mode is 50%, and the selectivity of the third display mode is 20%. When the fourth ending command is received, that is, when the advantageous jackpot result C is obtained, the fourth lottery table is selected. In this case, the selectivity of the first display mode is 85%, the selectivity of the second display mode is 10%, and the selectivity of the third display mode is 5%.

That is, when the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the display mode of the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode and the subsequent game round becomes the first display mode, so that the player can enter the high-probability mode with a long ending reference number. You will play the game with great expectations that it will become. In addition, even if the third display mode is selected, there is still a possibility that it is a high-probability mode, and furthermore, a high-probability mode with a long end reference count remains, so the player's expectations are completely lost. never end up.

When the fifth ending command is received, that is, when a small winning result is obtained during the low frequency support mode, the fifth lottery table is selected. In this case, the selectivity of the fourth display mode is 5%, the selectivity of the fifth display mode is 10%, and the selectivity of the sixth display mode is 85%. When the sixth ending command is received, that is, when the non-explicit high-probability jackpot result is obtained during the low-frequency support mode, the sixth lottery table is selected. In this case, the selectivity of the fourth display mode is 85%, the selectivity of the fifth display mode is 10%, and the selectivity of the sixth display mode is 5%.

In other words, when the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode is entered during the low-frequency support mode, and the low-frequency support mode continues after the opening/closing execution mode, the display mode for the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode and the subsequent game rounds is changed. By entering the fourth display mode, the player will play the game with great expectation that the high-probability mode has been entered. Further, even if the sixth display mode is selected, there is still a possibility that the display mode is the high-probability mode.

When the seventh ending command is received, that is, when a small winning result is obtained during the high frequency support mode, the seventh lottery table is selected. In this case, the selectivity of the first display mode is 5%, the selectivity of the second display mode is 10%, and the selectivity of the third display mode is 85%. When the eighth ending command is received, that is, when a non-explicit high-probability jackpot result or an explicit high-probability jackpot result is obtained during the high-frequency support mode, the eighth lottery table is selected. In this case, the selectivity of the first display mode is 85%, the selectivity of the second display mode is 10%, and the selectivity of the third display mode is 5%.

In other words, when the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode is entered during the high-frequency support mode, the display mode of the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode and the subsequent game round becomes the first display mode, so that the player can determine the end criterion. The game is played with great expectation that the resetting of the high-probability mode, which has a long number of times, has been performed. In addition, even if the third display mode is set, there is still a possibility that it is the high probability mode, and furthermore, there is a possibility that the high probability mode with a long end reference count has been reset. The feeling never completely disappears.

Returning to the description of the ending handling process (FIG. 27), if a negative determination is made in step S1501, it means that an explicit ending command has been received. In this case, in step S1505, after setting the display mode for clarification, this ending handling process ends. Note that the ending command corresponding to the display mode set here is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1220 in the main side command correspondence processing (FIG. 22), so that the image corresponding to the set display mode is displayed as a pattern. Display control is performed in the display side MPU 92 so as to be displayed on the display device 41 . After that, this ending correspondence processing is ended.

The explicit ending command is transmitted from the main side MPU 62 when an explicit high probability jackpot result is obtained in the low frequency support mode. In the case of a clear high-probability jackpot result during the low-frequency support mode, the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode is performed, and then the high-frequency support mode. On the other hand, other hit results do not behave like this. Therefore, it is possible for the player to clearly recognize that the result of the explicit high-probability jackpot has been reached. Therefore, when the result of the explicit high-probability jackpot is obtained in the low frequency support mode, the display mode for explicit indication is set so as to clearly inform the player of this fact. In the explicit display mode, the pattern display device 41 displays an image indicating that the high probability mode is selected, and also displays an image indicating that the standard end count is 70 times.

Next, mode processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the mode processing is executed at step S1201 in the master-side command handling processing (FIG. 22).

In the mode processing, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether the current display mode is one of the first to third display modes and the explicit display mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, it is determined in step S1602 whether or not an explicit high-probability state end command or a high-frequency state end command has been received. As already explained, the end command of the explicit high probability state is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. This is a command sent from the main MPU 62 when shifting to a mode state. In addition, as already explained, the end command of the high-frequency state is the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. This command is sent from the main MPU 62 when transitioning to the support mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S1602, the process for this mode is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, the display mode is set to the normal mode, and after that, in step S1604, after transmitting the normal mode command to the display side MPU 92, the process for this mode ends. The normal mode is a display mode for notifying that the mode is the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, and the pattern display device 41 displays an image corresponding to it, and the speaker unit 54 responds to it. sound is output.

If a negative determination is made in step S1601, it is determined in step S1605 whether the current display mode is any one of the fourth to sixth display modes. If a negative determination is made in step S1605, the process for this mode is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1605, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, it is determined whether or not the lottery condition for the display mode is satisfied. Specifically, numerical information is acquired from a random number counter for lottery condition determination, which is a counter provided in the sound and light side RAM 84 and whose numerical information is periodically updated (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec). is numerical information corresponding to the establishment of the lottery condition. The probability that the lottery condition is satisfied is 10% until the game round is executed 10 times after the open/close execution mode, 50% in the range of 11 to 20 times, and 80 in the range of 21 to 30 times. %, and when it reaches 31 times, it becomes 100%. If a negative determination is made in step S1606, the process for this mode is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1606, the process proceeds to step S1607.

In step S1607, a display mode lottery process is executed. In this lottery process, the same process as step S1503 in the ending correspondence process (FIG. 27) is executed. However, in the lottery process, a lottery for switching to the normal mode is first performed. The probability of winning the transition to the normal mode is 10% until the game is executed 10 times after the open/close execution mode, 50% in the range of 11 to 20 times, and 50% in the range of 21 to 30 times. is 80% in , and becomes 100% in the case of 31 times. If the transfer to the normal mode is won, the normal mode is set in step S1608, and after transmitting the corresponding display mode command to the display side MPU 92 in the following step S1609, the process for this mode ends. do. On the other hand, if the transfer to the normal mode is not won, the same lottery table as the lottery table used in the previous step S1503 is used as the lottery table. Then, in step S1608, the display mode corresponding to the lottery result is set, and in subsequent step S1609, after transmitting the corresponding display mode command to the display side MPU 92, the process for this mode ends.

As described above, even if the high-probability mode is entered, when the end reference number of game rounds is executed, the low-probability mode is entered even if the opening/closing execution mode does not occur, and the end reference number of times is 0 times. In a configuration in which a plurality of types such as 30 times, 50 times and 70 times are set, the symbol display device 41 or the like provides an effect for allowing the player to predict the high probability mode and the reference number of times for ending the high probability mode. is done. As a result, the player not only expects to enter the high-probability mode, but also expects to enter the high-probability mode with a greater number of end criteria, thereby improving the interest of the game. is planned.

<Production using external device EX>
Next, a configuration for producing an effect using the external device EX will be described. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram for explaining the outline of the electrical configuration of a game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines 10 are installed.

As shown in FIG. 30, an island facility S is provided in the game hall, and a large number of pachinko machines 10 are installed for the island facility S. As shown in FIG. As management control means for managing each pachinko machine 10, the game hall is provided with a hall computer HC. Hall computer HC is an electronic computing device having a management program, and MPU 201 is mounted therein. The MPU 201 has a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and temporarily stores various data and information input from the pachinko machine 10 when executing the control program stored in the ROM 202. and a RAM 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing the data. The hall computer HC is electrically connected to each pachinko machine 10 through the electrical wiring group EL1. Then, management processing based on the information received from each pachinko machine 10 is executed.

An external device EX is installed in the island facility S so as to correspond to each pachinko machine 10 on a one-to-one basis. Each external device EX is mounted above the corresponding pachinko machine 10, is electrically connected to the hall computer HC through the electric wiring group EL2, and is electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 through the electric wiring group EL3. It is connected. Each external device EX is provided with an external display device 301 for displaying various information, and a plurality of types of external operation units 302 operated to display various information on the external display device 301. It is

The external display device 301 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by an external control board (described later) provided in the external device EX. The external display device 301 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, or a dot matrix display device. There may be.

In the external display device 301, at least one of the number of game rounds executed since the previous opening/closing execution mode, the number of executions of the opening/closing execution mode, the number of balls released since the opening of the game hall, the high probability mode, and the high frequency support mode. Various types of information such as the number of opening/closing execution modes occurring in the continuing situation and the number of balls released in the continuing situation are displayed based on signals from the hall computer HC. As a result, the player can grasp the various types of information by visually recognizing the external display device 301 . Various information displayed on the external display device 301 can be switched by operating the external operation unit 302 .

31(a) and 31(a) and 31(a) and FIG. Description will be made with reference to (b).

As shown in FIG. 31(a), the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an external terminal board 79. The main MPU 62 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 79 through the electrical wiring group EL4, and the hall computer HC is connected to the external terminal board 79. is electrically connected to the external terminal board 79 through the electric wiring group EL1, and the external device EX is electrically connected to the external terminal board 79 through the electric wiring group EL3. Various signals are transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 79, and various signals are transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the external device EX. Signal transmission from the hall computer HC to the pachinko machine 10, signal transmission from the external device EX to the pachinko machine 10, and signal transmission from the external device EX to the hall computer HC are not performed. .

As shown in FIG. 31(b), the external terminal plate 79 is provided with a plurality of external terminals 79a to 79l. A total of 12 external terminals 79a to 79l are provided, of which 9 external terminals 79a to 79i are terminals for outputting information from the main MPU 62 to the hall computer HC. The external terminals 79j to 79l are terminals for externally outputting information from the main side MPU 62 toward the external device EX.

Specifically, as a terminal for externally outputting information from the main MPU 62 to the hall computer HC, information indicating that the main MPU 62 is in the opening/closing execution mode based on winning a jackpot in the lottery of the main MPU 62. and an external terminal 79a for the jackpot used to output the information indicating that it is in the open/close execution mode based on the jackpot or the small win in the winning lottery of the main side MPU 62. An external terminal 79b for the opening/closing execution mode used for opening/closing execution mode, an external terminal 79c for the number of games used for outputting information indicating that one game round has ended, and an opening/closing execution mode and high-frequency support. An external terminal 79d used for displaying information indicating that it is in any of the modes, and that a prize has been won in either the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. an operating external terminal 79e used for outputting information indicating that a predetermined fraud has occurred; an external terminal 79f for fraud detection used for outputting information indicating that a predetermined fraud has occurred; An external terminal 79g for payout used to output information indicating that the ball has been paid out, and a main body opening terminal 79g used to output information indicating that the game machine main body 12 is being opened. An external terminal 79h and an external terminal 79i for opening the front door used for outputting information indicating that the front door frame 14 is being opened are included.

The type of terminal for outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC is not limited to the above. A configuration in which an external terminal used for output is provided may be employed. In addition, an external terminal used for outputting information indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have been shot may be provided.

The MPU 201 of the hall computer HC manages the pachinko machine 10 using the signals received through the external terminals 79a to 79i. For example, when it is specified that fraud is detected in the pachinko machine 10, the administrator of the game hall or the like is notified that the pachinko machine 10 is abnormal. Also, management data for managing the number of prize balls generated in the pachinko machine 10 is created. In addition, the number of occurrences of the opening and closing execution mode, the number of consecutive opening and closing execution modes in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues, and the number of game balls paid out during the consecutive games are totaled, and the total information is displayed externally. The data is output to the external device EX through the electrical wiring group EL2 so that it can be displayed on the device 301. FIG. This enables the external display device 301 to output the above various information. In addition, in a configuration in which not only information indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have been paid out but also information indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have been shot are output from the main MPU 62 to the hall computer HC, The MPU 201 of the hall computer HC aggregates the increase/decrease in the number of game balls in one pachinko machine 10, and transmits the aggregated result to the external device EX to display the aggregated result on the external display device 301. good too.

As a terminal for outputting information from the main MPU 62 to the external device EX, an external terminal 79j for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, 1-bit data) included in the command data. and an external terminal 79k for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of the transmission start and transmission end of one command. In other words, a command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the external device EX through serial communication. A configuration in which an external terminal for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be provided separately may be employed, or a configuration may be employed in which commands are transmitted by parallel communication.

In the external device EX, a display effect linked with the pachinko machine 10 is performed by using the commands received through the external terminals 79j to 79l. Execution control of such display performance and execution control of information display based on signal reception from the hall computer HC are performed by an external control board 311 built in the external device EX. As shown in FIG. 31(a), the external control board 311 includes an external MPU 312, an external VDP 315, and an external character ROM 316. The external MPU 312 is an element in which a program ROM 313 and a work RAM 314 are integrated into a chip. and an external video RAM 317 are mounted.

The external MPU 312 analyzes various commands received from the main MPU 62 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the external VDP 315 (specifically, issue internal commands to the external VDP 315). generation).

The program ROM 313 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the external MPU 312, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. is. The work RAM 314 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the external MPU 312. The work RAM 314 is a volatile memory that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. It is a means of sexual memory.

The external VDP 315 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the external display device 301 . Since the VDP 315 on the external side is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The external VDP 315 adjusts the timing of each of the external MPU 312, the external video RAM 317, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data. , and displayed on the external display device 301 at a predetermined timing.

The external character ROM 316 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns to be displayed on the external display device 301 . The external character ROM 316 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

The external video RAM 317 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the external display device 301. By rewriting the contents of the external video RAM 317, the display content of the external display device 301 is changed. be.

Here, in the program ROM 313 of the external MPU 312, in addition to a program dedicated to the external device EX and fixed value data for displaying various information on the external display device 301 based on the operation of the external operation unit 302, In the program ROM 93 of the display side MPU 92, the same program and fixed value data as the program and fixed value data for controlling the display of the effect for the game cycle are stored. Further, the external character ROM 316 stores image data of various characters stored in the character ROM 96 of the display control device 90, and image data used as an effect for game rounds. As a result, it is possible for the external display device 301 to perform the same display effect as the display effect for the game cycle displayed on the pattern display device 41 based on the display control of the external MPU 312 .

<Processing configuration for effecting using external device EX>
Next, a processing configuration for producing effects using the external device EX will be described.

<External Output Processing at Start of Fluctuation Executed by Main MPU 62>
First, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 32(a), the external output processing at the start of fluctuation executed by the main MPU 62 will be described. In addition, the external output process at the start of fluctuation is executed in step S417 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 14).

In the external output process at the start of fluctuation, first, in step S1701, an interlocking effect generation lottery is executed. Specifically, numerical information is obtained from a random number counter for generation lottery, which is a counter provided in the main RAM 64 and whose numerical information is periodically updated (for example, in a 4 msec cycle), and the numerical information is It is determined whether or not the numerical information corresponds to the generation winning of the interlocking performance. The probability of winning the occurrence of the interlocking effect is 70% if the current game round is a game round that results in a small win or a big win, and is 50% if the game round this time is a game round that results in a loss and a ready-to-win display. 10% if the current game round is a game round in which the reach display does not occur. In the following step S1702, it is determined whether or not the result of the occurrence lottery in step S1701 is the occurrence winning of the interlocking effect. If a negative determination is made in step S1702, this external output process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1703.

In step S1703, the command correspondence table is read from the main ROM 63. FIG. The command correspondence table is table data for specifying the external command at the start of variation corresponding to the variation command to be transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 in the current game round. The command correspondence table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 32(b).

As shown in FIG. 32(b), in the command correspondence table, the external command at the start of variation is set in one-to-one correspondence with the variation command. Here, as already explained, in response to one variation command transmitted from the main MPU 62, the sound and light MPU 82 can select a plurality of types of effect patterns based on the result of the advance notice lottery process. However, the effect patterns that can be selected from one variation command have common effect contents that exist in common. The data of this common effect content is set in the external command at the start of variation. In addition, as already explained, the variation command includes, in addition to the identification data for indicating that it is a variation command, lottery result data corresponding to the results of the winning/failure determination process and the allocation determination process. , and time data corresponding to the display continuation time are set. On the other hand, the external command at the start of fluctuation does not include the lottery result data and the time data. Therefore, the external command at the start of variation has a smaller amount of data than the variation command, specifically, 1-byte data. In the external command at the start of fluctuation, identification data for indicating that it is the external command at the start of fluctuation is set by the upper 4-bit data, and the above common command is set by the lower 4-bit data. The contents of the production are set.

Specifically, regarding the contents shown in FIG. is set with data capable of specifying the contents of pseudo-joint and A special reach as data of common effect contents. In addition, the external command at the start of variation of "B2" is set in correspondence with the command for variation of "A112", and the external command at the time of variation start has the content of C reach as the data of the common effect content. Identifiable data is set. In addition, the external command at the start of variation of "B3" is set in correspondence with the command for variation of "A113", and the external command at the time of the variation start includes three pseudo-continuous commands as data of common effect content. Data that can specify the content is set.

Returning to the description of the external output processing at the start of variation (FIG. 32(a)), after reading the command correspondence table in step S1703, the content of the variation command output this time to the sound and light side MPU 82 is performed in step S1704. identify. Then, in step S1705, it is determined whether or not the current game round is the game round corresponding to the small hit result, and in step S1706, whether the state is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. determine whether or not As a result of each of these determination processes, if the state is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode and the current game round is a small hit result, the process proceeds to step S1708, otherwise, step Proceed to S1707.

In step S1707, the external command at the start of variation corresponding to the variation command output this time to the sound and light side MPU 82 is read from the command correspondence table. On the other hand, in step S1708, the external command at the start of variation set one address lower than the external command at the start of variation corresponding to the command for variation output this time to the sound and light side MPU 82 is set as a command correspondence. read from the table. Here, in the command correspondence table, the variation command set one address lower than one variation command has a common effect content different from the common effect content of the former variation command. In addition to being set, the common effect content is effect content that cannot be selected by the sound and light side MPU 82 based on the former variation command. Therefore, in step S1708, it means that the external command at the time of variation start corresponding to the variation command whose effect content does not match the variation command transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 in the current game round is selected.

After executing the process of step S1707 or step S1708, the process advances to step S1709 to transmit the external command for start of variation selected in step S1707 or step S1708 to the external device EX via serial communication. After that, the external output processing is terminated.

<Playing effect control process executed by external MPU 312>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33, the game-turn effect control process executed by the external MPU 312 will be described. In addition, the said game time production|presentation control process is started regularly (for example, 2 msec period).

First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the external display device 301 is executing an effect for a game round. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not an external command for starting fluctuation has been received from the main MPU 62. When negative determination is made in step S1802, the present game round effect control processing is terminated as it is, and when affirmative determination is made in step S1802, in step S1803, it corresponds to the external command at the start of fluctuation received this time. The data table to be used is read out from the program ROM 313 and written in the work RAM 314 . After that, the effect control processing for this game cycle is terminated.

By setting the data table in step S<b>1803 , the internal command generated corresponding to the data table is periodically output from the external MPU 312 to the external VDP 315 . As a result, the external VDP 315 executes image output corresponding to the internal command, and the external display device 301 executes an interlocking effect for a game cycle corresponding to the external command at the start of the variation. The image corresponding to the interlocking effect for the game cycle is displayed on the display surface of the external display device 301. The number of executions of the opening/closing execution mode, the number of consecutive opening/closing execution modes, and the The image of various information such as the number of game rounds to be executed and the number of game balls to be paid out is displayed so as not to overlap the image corresponding to the interlocking effect for the game round.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, it is determined in step S1804 whether or not a game round end signal has been received from the hall computer HC. The game round end signal is transmitted to the hall computer HC in the external output process (step S602) at the end of the fluctuation of the special figure fixing process (FIG. 16) in the main side MPU 62, and the hall computer HC transmits the game round end signal. By receiving the signal, a game cycle end signal is transmitted to the external device EX corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that received the signal. The game round end signal may be directly transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the external device EX. In this case, the game round end signal may not be transmitted to the hall computer HC. may be

If a negative determination is made in step S1804, the present game round effect control processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, in step S1805, the game round use in the external display device 301 is performed. After ending the interlocking effect, the effect control process for this game cycle is ended. Specifically, in step S1805, the data table set in the previous step S1803 is cleared from the work RAM 314, and the data table for demonstration effect read out from the program ROM 313 is written in the work RAM 314. As a result, in the external display device 301, the interlocking effect for the game cycle is ended, and the demonstration effect is started.

<Details of the interlocking effect for the game cycle executed by the external device EX>
Next, with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 34, the contents of the interlocking running for the game cycle executed by the external device EX will be described. FIG. 34(a) shows a period in which the symbols are variably displayed only in the final stop symbol row (specifically, the symbol row Z2) in the symbol display device 41, and FIGS. 34(c-1), 34(c-2), 34(d-1), and 34(d-2) are the pattern display devices. 41 shows the display contents. Note that images other than the interlocking effects for the game cycle are omitted in FIGS. 34(b-1) to (b-4).

First, with reference to FIGS. 34(a) to 34(c), the case where the interlocking effect for the game cycle corresponding to the command for variation is executed will be described.

A variation command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the sound and light MPU 82, and an external command for starting variation is output from the main MPU 62 to the external MPU 312. As shown in FIG. 34(b-1), as shown in FIG. 34(b-1), the interlocking effect for the game round starts on the external display device 301. be done.

In this case, the pattern display device 41 starts the ready-to-win effect using the first character CH1 as the ready-to-win character after the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 34(c-2). In the display device 301, as shown in FIGS. 34(b-1) and 34(b-2), the second An advance notice effect using one character CH1 is started. After the timing t1, as shown in FIGS. 34(b-3), 34(b-4) and 34(c-2), both the external display device 301 and the pattern display device 41 An effect using one character CH1 is performed. Note that the external display device 301 displays a moving image in which the first character CH1 advances in a predetermined direction from the start timing of the interlocking effect for the game round. is displayed on the external display device 301 until is completed.

By displaying the first character CH1 on the external display device 301 at the timing before the timing t1 as described above, the ready-to-win effect using the first character CH1 is generated on the pattern display device 41. It is possible to notify in advance that As a result, by checking the external display device 301, the player can grasp in advance the content of the performance generated by the pattern display device 41, and can increase the expectation for the occurrence of the big win. becomes.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 34(a), 34(b), and 34(d), the case where the interlocking effect for the game cycle that does not correspond to the variation command is executed will be described.

A variation command is transmitted from the main side MPU 62 to the sound and light side MPU 82, and an external command at the time of variation start is externally output from the main side MPU 62 to the external side MPU 312, so that FIG. As shown in FIG. 34(b-1), as shown in FIG. 34(b-1), as shown in FIG. be done.

In this case, the external display device 301 starts the interlocking effect using the first character CH1, but after the timing t1, the pattern display device 41 does not start the effect using the first character CH1. An effect using a second character CH2 different from the first character CH1 is started. Note that the first character CH1 is not displayed on the pattern display device 41 at all. In this game cycle, the external display device 301 performs an effect using the first character CH1, and the pattern display device 41 performs an effect using the second character CH2 throughout the entire game after the timing t1. .

As described above, the character displayed on the pattern display device 41 is different from the character displayed for notice on the external display device 301, so that the player recognizes that there is some kind of mismatch. . Then, the mismatch of the characters occurs in the state of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, that is, in a situation in which it is not clearly indicated to the player that the success/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the high probability mode is set internally by using the interlocking performance, and to increase the degree of attention of the player to the content of the performance on the external display device 301.例文帳に追加becomes possible.

Further, the character mismatch as described above occurs when a small winning result is obtained in the state of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage for the player of the small winning result.

<External output setting process at bonus start time executed by main MPU 62>
Next, the external output setting process at the start of the bonus, which is executed by the main MPU 62, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35(a). It should be noted that the external output setting process at the start of the bonus is executed in step S611 in the process during special figure determination (FIG. 16).

In the external output setting process at the start of the bonus, first, in step S1901, various signals are set to HI level. Specifically, among the signals transmitted to the hall computer HC through the external terminal plate 79, the signal outputted through the external terminal 79a for the jackpot and the signal outputted through the external terminal 79b for the opening/closing execution mode are combined. The signal output through the external terminal 79d for display is set to HI level.

In the subsequent step S1902, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1902, this external output setting process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903. In step S1903, reproduction lottery processing is executed. Specifically, numerical information is acquired from a reproduction lottery random number counter, which is a counter provided in the main RAM 64 and whose numerical information is updated periodically (for example, in a 4 msec cycle). It is determined whether or not the numerical information corresponds to the occurrence winning of the reproduction effect. The probability of winning the occurrence of the reproduction effect is 50% when the premium character does not appear in the immediately preceding game round, and is 80% when the premium character appears in the immediately preceding game round. . In the following step S1904, it is determined whether or not the result of the reproduction lottery process in step S1903 is the generation winning of the reproduction effect. If a negative determination is made in step S1904, this external output setting process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1904, the process proceeds to step S1905.

In step S1905, the variable command transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 in the previous game round is read, and in subsequent step S1906, the read variable command is transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication. After that, the external output setting process is terminated. In addition, in the variation command corresponding to the appearance of the premium character, the premium character is set as a common effect content. That is, when the variation command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82, the premium character is displayed on the pattern display device 41 regardless of the result of the advance notice lottery process in the sound and light side MPU 82.

<External output setting process at the end of the bonus executed by the main MPU 62>
Next, the external output setting process at the end of the bonus, which is executed by the main MPU 62, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35(b). The external output setting process at the end of the bonus is executed in step S903 in the special electric end process (FIG. 19).

In the external output setting process at the end of the bonus, first, in step S2001, various signals are set to LOW level. Specifically, among the signals transmitted to the hall computer HC through the external terminal plate 79, the signal output through the external terminal 79a for the jackpot and the signal output through the external terminal 79b for the opening/closing execution mode are set to LOW. set to level. Further, when the low-frequency support mode is entered after the end of the opening/closing execution mode this time, the signal output through the external terminal 79d for displaying a series of villas is set to LOW level.

If the low-frequency support mode is not entered after the current opening/closing execution mode is terminated, but the high-frequency support mode is entered, the signal output through the external terminal 79d for displaying a series of villas is maintained at the HI level. In this case, the signal is set to LOW level at step S803 or step S809 in the mode transition processing (FIG. 18) in the main MPU 62. FIG.

In the subsequent step S2002, corresponding to the type of the ending command transmitted to the sound and light side MPU82 in the last ending command output process (FIG. 26) in the special electric closing process (step S311) of the special special electric control process (FIG. 13) A command corresponding to the number of times is read from the main ROM 63 . That is, when the first ending command is transmitted, the command corresponding to the first count is read, when the second ending command is transmitted, the command corresponding to the second count is read, and the third ending command is transmitted. If so, read the command corresponding to the third number of times; if the fourth ending command is sent, read the command corresponding to the fourth number; if the fifth ending command is sent, read the command corresponding to the fifth number; If the sixth ending command is transmitted, the command corresponding to the sixth count is read, and if the seventh ending command is transmitted, the command corresponding to the seventh count is read, and the eighth ending command is transmitted. If so, the command corresponding to the eighth count is read, and if the explicit ending command has been sent, the command corresponding to the explicit count is read. In the following step S2003, the read command corresponding to the number of times is transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication. After that, the external output setting process is terminated.

<Bonus effect control process executed by external MPU 312>
Next, the bonus effect control process executed by the external MPU 312 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the bonus effect control process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the external display device 301 is executing a bonus presentation. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, it is determined in step S2102 whether or not the winning system signal received from the hall computer HC is at HI level. As already explained, the pachinko machine 10 has a jackpot signal through the external terminal 79a for the jackpot and a signal for the opening/closing execution mode through the external terminal 79b for the opening/closing execution mode as signals indicating that it is in the opening/closing execution mode. and can be sent. On the other hand, in the hole computer HC, by selecting the side to be electrically connected among the external terminals 79a and 79b, only the desired signal out of the signal for the big win and the signal for the opening/closing execution mode is received. By doing so, it is possible to manage the number of times of the desired side out of the number of times of the big winning result and the number of times of opening/closing execution mode while suppressing the number of input terminals on the hall computer HC side. Under such circumstances, a signal selected by the hall computer HC is transmitted from the hall computer HC to the external device EX. Therefore, in step S2102, it is determined whether or not the signal for which electrical connection is selected in the hall computer HC, out of the jackpot signal and the opening/closing execution mode signal, is at HI level.

When negative determination is made in step S2102, this bonus effect control processing is terminated as it is, and when affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, it is determined whether or not a variation command has been received from the main MPU62. If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the data table for the normal bonus effect is read out from the program ROM 313 and written in the work RAM 314 in step S2104.

By setting the data table in step S<b>2104 , an internal command corresponding to the data table is generated and periodically output from the external MPU 312 to the external VDP 315 . As a result, the external VDP 315 executes image output corresponding to the internal command, and the external display device 301 executes a normal bonus effect. The image corresponding to the normal bonus effect is displayed on the display surface of the external display device 301. The number of executions of the opening/closing execution mode, the number of consecutive games in the opening/closing execution mode, and the number of game times after the opening/closing execution mode are displayed. The image of various information such as the number of executions and the number of game balls to be paid out is displayed so as not to overlap the image corresponding to the normal bonus effect.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the game cycle data table corresponding to the variation command is read out from the program ROM 313 and written in the work RAM 314 in step S2105. At this time, the data table for the normal bonus effect to be used after the execution control of the display effect using the data table for the game round is finished is also written in the read work RAM 314 .

By setting the data table in step S<b>2105 , an internal command corresponding to the data table is generated and periodically output from the external MPU 312 to the external VDP 315 . As a result, the image output corresponding to the internal command is executed in the external VDP 315, and the external display device 301 executes the reproduction performance of the game cycle corresponding to the content of the variation command. The reproduction effect of the game round is an effect in which the display effect for the game round executed by the pattern display device 41 in the game round immediately before the current opening/closing execution mode is reproduced on the external display device 301. That is. By executing the reproduction effect of the game round in this way on the external display device 301, the player misses the display effect executed by the pattern display device 41 during the game round which triggers the shift to the opening/closing execution mode. Even so, it is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to confirm it. In addition, it is possible to provide the opportunity to the player who wants to reconfirm the performance of the game round that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode and to feel a sense of superiority.

However, in this reproduction effect, the effect for the game cycle is reproduced within the limit of the effect contents that can be specified from the contents of the command for variation. Specifically, since the lottery process for the notice effect is executed by the sound and light side MPU 82, the content of the notice effect cannot be specified from the command for variation. In addition, since the type of symbol that is finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41 at the end of the game round is also determined by lottery in the sound and light side MPU 82, the content of the final symbol can be specified from the command for variation. Can not. On the other hand, the result of win/fail determination, the result of distribution determination, the display duration of game rounds, and the type of common effect content can be specified from the command for variation. Therefore, in the reproduction effect, the effect is executed over the display duration time of the previous game round, and the common effect such as the ready-to-win effect that occurred in the previous game round is also executed, and finally the stop display is performed. The type of pattern can correspond to the result of win/fail judgment and the result of allocation judgment, but the type of pattern may not match the one in the previous game round, and further advance notice effects may not match the contents of the previous game round. In addition, in the reproduction effect, the final stop symbol may not be displayed, and the advance notice effect may not be executed.

In addition, when the external display device 301 is executing the reproduction effect, the symbol display device 41 is executing the display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the speaker unit 54 of the pachinko machine 10 outputs a sound corresponding to the display effect of the opening/closing execution mode, and the external device EX is not provided with a function of outputting the sound. Therefore, when the reproduction effect is executed, the display effect in the pattern display device 41 is reproduced in the effect for the game round, and the sound output effect in the speaker section 54 is not reproduced. The same applies to the light emission effects in the display light emitting section 53 .

The image corresponding to the reproduction effect of the game round is displayed on the display surface of the external display device 301, but the number of executions of the opening/closing execution mode, the number of consecutive opening/closing execution modes, and the game after the opening/closing execution mode are displayed. The images of various information such as the number of times the game is executed and the number of game balls to be paid out are displayed so as not to overlap the image corresponding to the reproduction effect of the game times.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, in step S2106, the signal on the side of the jackpot signal and the opening/closing execution mode signal for which electrical connection is selected in the hall computer HC becomes LOW level. determine whether or not there is When an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, end processing of the bonus effect is executed in step S2107. Specifically, the data table set in step S2104 or step S2105 is cleared from work RAM314, and the data table for demonstration effects read from program ROM313 is written into work RAM314. As a result, the external display device 301 terminates the bonus effect and starts the demonstration effect.

If the process of step S2104, step S2105, or step S2107 has been executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S2106, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, it is determined whether or not a command corresponding to the number of times has been received from the main MPU 62. When the command corresponding to the number of times has not been received, this bonus effect control processing is terminated as it is, and when the command corresponding to the number of times has been received, the process proceeds to step S2109.

In step S2109, the lottery table corresponding to the command corresponding to the number of times received this time is read out from the program ROM 313. FIG. The lottery table has the same configuration as the lottery table used in the display mode lottery process executed in steps S1502 to S1504 of the ending correspondence process (FIG. 27) in the sound and light side MPU 82. It is pre-stored in the ROM 313 . Then, in step S2109, if the command corresponding to the first number of times has been received, the same lottery table as in the case of the first ending command is read, and if the command corresponding to the second number of times has been received, the second ending command is read. Read out the same lottery table as in the case of , read out the same lottery table as in the case of the third ending command when receiving the command corresponding to the third number, and read out the same lottery table as in the case of the third ending command when receiving the command corresponding to the fourth number A lottery table similar to that for the fourth ending command is read, and when a command corresponding to the fifth number is received, a lottery table similar to that for the fifth ending command is read, and a command corresponding to the sixth number is received. If so, read the same lottery table as in the case of the 6th ending command, and if the command corresponding to the 7th number is received, read out the same lottery table as in the case of the 7th ending command, and read out the same lottery table as in the case of the 7th ending command. is received, the same lottery table as in the case of the eighth ending command is read.

In subsequent step S2110, a lottery process for the display mode is executed. In the lottery process of the display mode, numerical information is acquired from an external random number counter, which is a counter provided in the work RAM 314 and whose numerical information is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec). is collated with the lottery table read in step S2109 to select the display mode. Then, in step S2111, the selected display mode is set as a future display mode. The types of display modes are the same as the types of display modes selected in the sound and light side MPU 82, and specifically, six types of first to sixth display modes are set. Also, the selection rate of each display mode in each lottery table is the same as in the case of the lottery table referred to by the sound/light side MPU 82 (see FIG. 28). By executing the display mode setting process in step S<b>2111 , an image corresponding to the set display mode is displayed on the external display device 301 . This image type corresponds to the display mode on a one-to-one basis, and by checking the external display device 301, it is possible to recognize which display mode is selected in the external device EX.

It should be noted that when the number-of-clearance corresponding command is received, the display mode for explicitness is set instead of the processing of steps S2109 to S2111. In addition, the display according to the display mode on the external display device 301 is changed to the display in the normal mode when the high-frequency support mode is terminated if the high-frequency support mode is in effect, and the display is changed to the display in the normal mode if the low-frequency support mode is in the game mode. The display is changed to the normal mode when the cycle is executed 20 times.

<The scene where the game round is reproduced>
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, how the external display device 301 reproduces a game cycle will be described. FIG. 37(a) shows the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode, FIG. 3) shows the display contents of the external display device 301 when the reproduction effect of the game round is executed, FIG. 37(d) shows the execution period of the opening and closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode, and FIG. 37(e). indicates the display contents of the external display device 301 when only the normal bonus effect is executed.

The opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode continues at least over the duration T1 of the high-frequency winning mode, as shown in FIG. 37(a). Specifically, the opening period (eg 4 sec), the period (eg 5.4 sec) obtained by multiplying the upper limit number of round games and the firing cycle of the game ball, the number of round games executed (eg 15) and , It continues at least over the total period of the interval period between each round game (for example, 28 sec) and the ending period (for example, 6 sec). This continuation period T1 is a period equal to or longer than the longest display continuation time T2 that can be selected in a game round. Therefore, in the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode, the external display device 301 displays the entire game round effect, regardless of what kind of game round effect was executed in the previous game round. It is possible to reproduce.

Further, the duration T1 of the high-frequency winning mode is set longer than the display duration T2 that can be selected in the game round. Correspondingly, in the external display device 301, for example, when the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode is started in the pachinko machine 10 at the timing of t11, the opening/closing execution of the high-frequency winning mode is performed until the timing of t21 after a predetermined period. A display effect indicating the start of the mode is performed, and the reproduction effect of the game round is started at the timing of t21. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37(c-1), the external display device 301 starts the variable display of symbols in the same manner as the variable display of the symbols for the game cycle on the symbol display device 41. . After that, as shown in FIG. 37(c-2), the external display device 301 performs a ready-to-win effect similar to the ready-to-win effect performed by the pattern display device 41 in the previous game round. After that, at the timing of t22 when the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode is continuing, the reproduction performance of the game round is terminated. In this case, the normal bonus effect is started on the external display device 301 from the timing of t22, as shown in FIG. 37(c-3). Then, at the timing of t12 after that, as shown in FIG. 37(a), the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode is terminated. In this case, the normal bonus effect on the external display device 301 is terminated.

On the other hand, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the shortest duration T3 is shorter than the duration T1 of the high-frequency winning mode and shorter than the longest display duration T2 that can be selected in the game cycle. Therefore, when the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode is entered, the normal bonus effect is started on the external display device 301 from the timing t31, which is the start timing, as shown in FIG. 37(e). Then, the normal bonus effect is continued over the timing of t32, which is the end timing of the opening/closing execution mode.

<A scene in which an effect is performed to predict the standard number of times to end the high-probability mode>
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, how the pattern display device 41 and the external display device 301 perform effects for predicting the standard number of times to end the high-probability mode will be described. FIG. 38(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the external display device 301 performs an effect for predicting the standard number of times to end the high-probability mode, and FIG. 38(b) is a pattern display device. 41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how an effect for predicting the standard number of times for ending the high-probability mode is performed in 41. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 38(a), on the external display device 301, characters "Expect long continuation" are displayed as an effect for predicting the reference count for ending the high-probability mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 38(b), the symbol display device 41 displays characters "Expect middle or higher continuation" as an effect for predicting the reference number of times for ending the high probability mode. The symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301 each display the number of times the game has been played after the open/close execution mode (specifically, the characters "continuous number of times: 5 times").

As described above, the effect for predicting the standard number of times for ending the high probability mode is executed by the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301 respectively. Furthermore, lottery processing for determining the content of these effects is performed individually. As a result, the player can refer to a plurality of types of information when predicting the standard number of times for ending the high-probability mode, and can perform advanced prediction.

In the configuration where the external display device 301 displays corresponding to the standard number of times of termination in the high-probability mode, instead of displaying the standard number of times of termination as it is, the degree of expectation is displayed for the standard number of times of termination. , even if some kind of communication abnormality occurs in the communication path from the main MPU 62 to the external display device 301, inconvenience is unlikely to occur.

According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The main side MPU 62 outputs a command corresponding to the content of the performance for the game cycle to the external device EX. Then, an effect corresponding to the command is executed on the external display device 301 of the external device EX. As a result, it is possible to execute mutually related performances beyond the framework of the single pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

The main side MPU 62 externally outputs the external command at the time of start of fluctuation at the timing before the effect content of the effect for the game cycle becomes the content corresponding to the result of the success/failure determination. As a result, in a situation where an effect for a game round is being executed on the symbol display device 41 or the like, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the effect for the game round on the external display device 301 . In addition, since the external command at the start of the fluctuation does not include information that clearly indicates the result of the judgment, it is possible to suppress the act of misusing the result of illegally reading the external command at the start of the fluctuation. Become. Also, it is possible to prevent the result of the win/fail judgment from being displayed on the external display device 301 before being displayed on the pachinko machine 10 .

The external command at the start of the variation does not include not only the information that clearly indicates the result of the win/fail judgment, but also the information that clearly indicates the type of winning result. As a result, it is possible to suppress the act of exploiting the result of illegally reading the external command at the start of the fluctuation. Also, it is possible to prevent the type of winning result from being displayed on the external display device 301 before being displayed on the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

The external command at the start of the variation does not include not only the information that clearly indicates the result of the win/fail judgment but also the information that clearly indicates the display continuation time of the game round. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of types of external commands at the start of fluctuation, and to simplify the configuration for outputting the external command at the start of fluctuation. On the other hand, when the effect for the game cycle ends in the pachinko machine 10, a signal indicating the end is output to the outside. As a result, even if the external command at the time of start of variation does not include the display duration information, the external device EX can grasp the end of the performance for the game cycle.

Since the external command at the start of the fluctuation contains information corresponding to a part of the production range included in the production for the game round, the production corresponding to the part of the production range is It becomes possible to execute on the attached display device 301 . In addition, since it is configured to output information corresponding to a part of the effect range instead of outputting the entire effect for the game round, it is possible to reduce the types of external commands at the start of fluctuation, It is possible to simplify the configuration for outputting the external command at the start of fluctuation.

One external command at the start of variation is common to multiple types of effects for game rounds. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of types of external commands at the start of fluctuation, and to simplify the configuration for outputting the external command at the start of fluctuation.

Since the sound and light side MPU 82 is configured to execute advance notice lottery processing when receiving a variation command from the main side MPU 62 and derive a performance pattern corresponding to the lottery result, a plurality of types of performances can be obtained from one variation command. A pattern can be derived. In this case, the external command at the time of start of variation includes information specifying the content of presentation to be executed in common in the presentation pattern that can be derived from one variation command. Thus, even in a situation where the entire contents of the performance for the game cycle are not determined, the external command at the start of the variation is output so as to enable execution of the performance corresponding to the performance for the game cycle. becomes possible. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the output timing of the external command at the start of fluctuation is improved, and it is possible to facilitate the design of the configuration for outputting the external command at the start of fluctuation.

The external command at the start of variation corresponds to the variation command on a one-to-one basis. As a result, even if the external command at the start of variation is output in a situation in which the entirety of the performance contents for the game cycle has not been determined, the performance on the external display device 301 can be performed by the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the external display device 301. It is possible to correspond to the effect for the game round executed in the speaker unit 54 .

An external command at the start of fluctuation is externally output from the main side MPU 62 . As a result, the function of outputting an external command at the start of fluctuation is achieved in the main MPU 62 that controls the progress of the game, so that the function of managing the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be concentrated in the main MPU 62. - 特許庁

The main-side ROM 63 of the main-side MPU 62 stores in advance data defining the correspondence relationship between the command for variation and the external command at the start of variation. As a result, the main MPU 62 can uniquely read the external command at the start of variation from the variation command it has sent to the sound and light MPU 82, and the processing configuration for outputting the external command at the start of variation. is simplified.

After the game round effect is started, the main MPU 62 externally outputs a variation command corresponding to the game round effect to the external device EX. Then, the external display device 301 executes an effect corresponding to the received variation command. As a result, even if the player misses the performance for the game cycle, it is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to check the performance corresponding to the performance for the game cycle again.

When the main MPU 62 externally outputs a variation command corresponding to the game round effect to the external device EX, the main side MPU 62 externally outputs the variation command after the game round effect is finished. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reproduction effect on the external display device 301 and the effect for the game cycle on the pattern display device 41 from overlapping in terms of time. Therefore, it becomes possible to raise the degree of attention to each performance.

By using the variation command as it is as a command for executing the reproduction performance in the external device EX, there is no need to prepare a dedicated command for executing the reproduction performance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the types of commands required in the main MPU 62 .

When starting an effect for a game cycle, the main MPU 62 not only sends a variation command including information on the result of win/fail judgment, the result of distribution judgment, and display duration time, but also the result of win/fail judgment and the result of distribution judgment. to the sound and light side MPU 82. As a result, it becomes possible for the sound and light side MPU 82 to carefully confirm the result of the success/failure determination and the result of the distribution determination. In this case, it is only the command for variation that is externally output for executing the reproduction effect, and the type command is not output. This makes it possible to suppress the amount of information externally output from the main side MPU 62 while enabling execution of reproduction effect on the external display device 301 .

Not only the external command at the start of variation, but also the command for variation is externally output from the main MPU 62 to the external device EX. As a result, the function of outputting to the external device EX can be integrated into the main MPU 62 that controls the progress of the game.

The reproduction effect on the external display device 301 is performed while the pachinko machine 10 is executing the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening/closing execution mode. Also, the player can easily recognize that the reproduction effect performed on the external display device 301 corresponds to the effect for the game cycle performed before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

The reproduction effect on the external display device 301 is performed under the condition that the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode is executed in the pachinko machine 10, and is not performed under the condition that the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode is executed. . Thereby, the reproduction performance can be performed only when the period for performing the reproduction performance is secured, and the reproduction performance can be executed without difficulty.

When a small win result is obtained in the state of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the content of the effect on the external display device 301 by outputting the external command at the start of the fluctuation and the effect on the pattern display device 41 A situation may occur in which the content of the presentation for the game cycle does not match. As a result, the player confirms the correspondence relationship between the performances on the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301, thereby grasping whether or not the state is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. Prediction becomes possible, and it becomes possible to draw the player's attention to both the pattern display device 41 and the external display device 301 . Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

By changing the type of the external command at the start of variation to be externally output to the external device EX, the contents of the effects on the pattern display device 41 and the external display device 301 are prevented from matching. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the contents of both effects do not match, as described above, while the contents of the effects for the game cycle on the pattern display device 41 are not affected. In particular, the sound and light side MPU 82 determines the display continuation time of the game round according to the variation command received from the main side MPU 62, and also determines the content of the effect for the game round, so it is difficult to change the effect content. In response to this, by changing the type of the external command at the start of the fluctuation, the degree of freedom of the change mode is increased when the contents of the two effects are not to match, and the correspondence relationship between the two effects is improved. can be changed to

Since the discrepancies between the contents of the performances on the pattern display device 41 and the external display device 301 are triggered by the result of the small win, the player can easily grasp the timing when the discrepancies may occur. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage for the player of the result of a small win, and it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the result of a small win.

In the external display device 301, an effect is performed to notify in advance the type of ready-to-win effect in the pattern display device 41 according to the content of the external command at the time of start of variation. In this case, if there is a discrepancy between the contents of both effects on the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301, the content of the advance notification on the external display device 301 and the type of ready-to-win effect on the symbol display device 41 do not match. become. As a result, it is possible not only to notify the player of the high-probability mode but the low-frequency support mode, but also to give the player a sense of surprise at the time of the notification, thereby improving the interest of the game.

A plurality of external terminals 79a to 79l are provided on the external terminal plate 79, and among these, the external terminals 79a to 79i are terminals for externally outputting a signal corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10, and the signal is output to the outside using one terminal. On the other hand, the remaining external terminals 79j to 79l are terminals for externally outputting commands corresponding to the effects of the pachinko machine 10, and the commands are externally output using a plurality of terminals. Since the number of terminals for externally outputting the state of the pachinko machine 10 is one, even if there are a plurality of types of states of the pachinko machine 10 to be externally output, the external output is possible. It is possible to reduce the number of terminals while simplifying the configuration of the communication to be performed. On the other hand, since there are a plurality of terminals for externally outputting information corresponding to the content of the effect, it is possible to output the information as a command. This makes it possible to flexibly deal with the diversification of the types of information to be output to the outside.

In the configuration in which the high-probability mode is terminated when the number of game rounds corresponding to the end reference number of times is completed, a plurality of types of the end reference number of times are set. As a result, the player plays the game not only in the high-probability mode, but also in the expectation that the high-probability mode with a larger number of end reference times will be entered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player, and to improve the interest in the game.

A plurality of types of termination criteria are set for the state of the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. As a result, the player expects not only the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode, but also the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode with a greater number of ending reference times. The game will be played while doing so. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player, and to improve the interest in the game.

In the state of high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode, there is a state in which the end criterion count is smaller than the state of high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of the jackpot results in the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, and to increase the expectation for the occurrence of the jackpot results.

When a non-explicit high-probability jackpot result is obtained in the low-frequency support mode, it then transitions to a high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, while the high-frequency support mode results in an unexplained high-probability jackpot result. In this case, in the configuration in which the state is shifted to the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode after that, the termination reference number in the case of the non-explicit high-probability jackpot result is higher than that in the case of the advantageous jackpot result A and the advantageous jackpot result B. is also a large number of times. This makes it possible to raise expectations for the occurrence of a non-explicit high-probability jackpot result.

In the pattern display device 41, the degree of expectation of the end reference number of times is reported depending on the type of display mode. As a result, it is possible to favorably increase the expectation that a large number of ending reference times has been selected.

Notification of the degree of expectation of the end reference number of times is performed not only by the pattern display device 41 but also by the external display device 301 . As a result, the player, while confirming both the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301, expects that a larger number of end reference times will be selected. Also, a lottery for determining the contents of notification of the degree of expectation in the pattern display device 41 and a lottery for determining the contents of notification of the degree of expectation in the external display device 301 are performed separately. As a result, there are a plurality of types of information for predicting the end reference number of times, and the player can make advanced predictions.

The number corresponding command externally output from the main MPU 62 in order to notify the degree of expectation of the end reference number of times on the external display device 301 does not include information specifying the end reference number of times. This makes it possible to prevent the end reference number of times from being displayed as it is on the external display device 301 . Therefore, even if a communication error occurs with respect to the output of the command corresponding to the number of times, for example, it is possible to prevent the abnormal end reference number of times from being clearly indicated, and the player is less likely to be confused. In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the inconvenience that the external display device 301 indicates the reference number of times to end even though the standard number of times to end is not specified in the pachinko machine 10 .

The command corresponding to the number of times is externally output after the content corresponding to the result of the propriety determination is displayed in the special figure display unit 37a and the design display device 41. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the fact that the external device EX notifies the result of the big win before the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

From the main side MPU 62, an external command at the start of variation and a command for variation are externally output to the external device EX at different timings with respect to the effect for one game cycle. Then, on the external display device 301, an effect corresponding to each command and corresponding to the effect for the game cycle is executed. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to each timing on the external display device 301, and it is possible to diversify the contents of the effect to be executed on the external display device 301. FIG.

Of the commands externally output to the external device EX, the variation command contains more information regarding the performance for the game cycle than the external command at the time of variation start. As a result, when a plurality of types of effects are performed on the external display device 301 regarding the effects for one game round, it is possible to greatly differ the contents of the effects for each effect.

The external command at the start of the change should not include information that clearly indicates the result of the pass/fail judgment. It contains information that specifies the outcome of the decision. As a result, at the former timing, it is difficult for the external display device 301 to perform an effect that clearly indicates the result of the success/failure determination, while at the latter timing, it is possible to perform an effect that clearly indicates the result of the success/failure determination. becomes.

<Second embodiment>
The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for transmitting commands to the external device EX. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 39, an electrical configuration for communication among the pachinko machine 10, the external device EX and the hall computer HC will be described.

As shown in FIG. 39, the main MPU 62 can transmit various signals to the MPU 201 of the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 79 . The types of signals transmitted to this hall computer HC are the same as in the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, the main MPU 62 does not transmit commands to the external device EX. Instead, the sound and light side MPU 82 can transmit commands to the external device EX through the external terminal board 79 . The transmission of this command is performed by serial communication, as in the case where the main MPU 62 transmits the command to the external device EX in the first embodiment.

Here, the sound and light side MPU 82 transmits a command to the display side MPU 92 by serial communication, as in the first embodiment. In this case, the communication method for serial communication from the sound and light side MPU 82 to the external device EX is the same as the communication method for serial communication from the sound and light side MPU 82 to the display side MPU 92 . That is, a signal line for command data transmission, a signal line for clock signal, and a signal line for latch signal are provided as a group of signal lines for transmitting commands from the sound and light side MPU 82 to the display side MPU 92. However, as a signal line group for transmitting commands from the sound and light side MPU 82 to the external device EX, there are a signal line for command data transmission, a signal line for clock signal, and a signal line for latch signal. is provided. Therefore, the sound and light side MPU 82 can transmit the same command as the command transmitted to the display side MPU 92 to the external device EX, and can use the data structure for transmitting the command as it is. becomes.

Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 40, the master-side command correspondence processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 82 will be described.

In the master-side command handling process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received from the master-side MPU 62 . When these commands are received, an interlocking production generation lottery is executed in step S2202, and in subsequent step S2203, it is determined whether or not the result of the generation lottery is an interlocking production generation win. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, then in step S2204 the command correspondence table is read out from the sound and light side ROM 83, and in step S2205 the command corresponding to the variation command received this time is changed from the command correspondence table. Then, in step S2206, the read external command at the start of fluctuation is transmitted to the external device EX via serial communication. The processing contents of these steps S2202 to S2206 correspond to steps S1701 to S1703, steps S1707 and S1709 in the external output processing (FIG. 32) at the start of fluctuation executed by the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment. It is the same.

That is, in the present embodiment, the external command at the start of fluctuation is not sent from the main side MPU 62 to the external device EX, but is sent from the sound and light side MPU 82 to the external device EX. Along with this, the command correspondence table stored in the main side ROM 63 in the first embodiment is stored in the sound and light side ROM 83 . It should be noted that, as in the first embodiment, in the state of the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, in a game round in which a predetermined event occurs, such as a small hit result game round, the command for variation A configuration may be adopted in which an unsupported external command at the start of fluctuation is transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 82 to the external device EX.

When a negative determination is made in step S2203, or when the process of step S2206 is executed, the process for determining the stop result command and pattern command is executed in step S2207. In this process, the same processes as steps S1203 to S1207 of the master side command handling process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment are executed. In the following step S2208, the stop result command and pattern command determined in step S2207 are stored in the sound/light RAM 84. FIG. Thereafter, in step S2209, the stop result command and pattern command determined in step S2207 are transmitted to the display side MPU 92. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S2201 or after the process of step S2209 is executed, it is determined in step S2210 whether or not an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 . If an opening command has been received, an opening handling process is executed in step S2211, and an opening command is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in subsequent step S2212. The processing contents of these steps S2211 and S2212 are the same as steps S1212 and S1213 of the main-side command correspondence processing (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment.

In the subsequent step S2213, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2213, a reproduction lottery process is executed in step S2214, and it is determined in step S2215 whether or not a reproduction lottery has been won. In the case of a repeat winning, in step S2216, the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in the game cycle immediately before the current open/close execution mode are transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication. A first opening command is transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication. As a result, the external MPU 312 starts the opening effect of the opening/closing execution mode on the external display device 301, and after the end of the opening effect, the effect performed on the symbol display device 41 in the immediately previous game round. , the display of the external display device 301 is controlled so that the reproduction effect of the game cycle is performed on the external display device 301 .

In particular, since it is configured to externally output stop result commands and pattern commands based on the details of the advance notice lottery process and the stop symbol determination process, instead of the variation commands, the external MPU 312 outputs the pattern display device 41 It becomes possible to specify the entire contents of the effect for the game cycle that has been executed. Therefore, in the reproduction effect, it is possible to reproduce the effect of exactly the same contents as the effect for the game round executed by the pattern display device 41 .

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2213 or if a negative determination is made in step S2215, then in step S2217 the second opening command is transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication. As a result, the external MPU 312 controls the display of the external display device 301 so that the normal bonus effect is performed.

If the process of step S2216 or step S2217 has been executed, other processes are executed in step S2218, and then this master side command handling process ends. In the other processes, the same processes as steps S1209 to S1210 and steps S1214 to S1228 of the master side command handling process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment are executed.

Next, the display side command corresponding processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41(a). The display-side command handling process is executed at step S1104 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 21).

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not an exit command for a specific character has been received from the display side MPU 92 or not. The exit command for the specific character is transmitted from the display side MPU 92 to the sound and light side MPU 82 at a timing during execution of a predetermined game round effect. The predetermined game-play effect is a effect in which the specific character is variably displayed on the pattern display device 41 until an intermediate timing. It's time to stop being. If the exit command has been received, in step S2302 the exit command is externally output to the external device EX through serial communication.

If a negative determination is made in step S2301, or if the process of step S2302 is executed, other processes are executed in step S2303, and then this display-side command handling process ends. In addition, in the other processing, processing corresponding to other commands transmitted from the display side MPU 92 is executed.

Next, specific character effect control processing executed by the external MPU 312 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41(b). Incidentally, the effect control process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) in the external MPU 312 .

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not an exit command has been received from the MPU 82 on the sound and light side. When the exit command is not received, the main effect control processing is terminated as it is, and when the exit command is received, the process proceeds to step S2402.

In step S2402, after the effect table for the specific character is read out from the program ROM 313 and written in the work RAM 314, the effect control process is finished. As a result, the external MPU 312 outputs an internal command to the external VDP 315 every time the image is updated according to the effect table for the specific character. When the external VDP 315 outputs a signal corresponding to the internal command, the external display device 301 performs an effect using the specific character.

Next, a description will be given of how the design display device 41 and the external display device 301 perform an effect using a specific character with reference to FIG. 42 .

42(a) shows the execution period of the game round effect on the pattern display device 41, FIG. 42(b) shows the execution period of the specific character effect on the pattern display device 41, and FIG. 42(c) shows the external display. 42(d) shows the execution period of the specific character presentation on the external display device 301. FIG. 42(A) and 42(B) show how the specific character presentation is executed on the pattern display device 41 and the external display device 301. FIG.

By starting the game round at the timing t1, as shown in FIGS. 42(a) and 42(c), the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301 respectively start the game round effects. be. After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 42(b), the specific character effect is started on the pattern display device 41. FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42(A), the specific character CH3 is variably displayed while the design is variably displayed on the design display device 41 . In this case, the external display device 301 does not display the specific character CH3.

After that, at timing t3, as shown in FIG. 42(b), the specific character effect in the pattern display device 41 is terminated, and the specific character CH3 disappears from the pattern display device 41, as shown in FIG. 42(d). As shown, the specific character effect on the external display device 301 is started and the specific character CH3 appears on the external display device 301 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42B, the specific character CH3 is variably displayed on the external display device 301 . In this case, the symbol display device 41 continues to variably display the symbols, but the specific character CH3 is not displayed.

After that, at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 42(d), the specific character presentation on the external display device 301 ends, and at timing t5, shown in FIGS. 42(a) and 42(c). Thus, the game-turn effect on the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301 is terminated.

It should be noted that, in the game cycle in which the specific character CH3 is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the degree of expectation for transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the degree of expectation for occurrence of ready-to-win are higher than in the game cycle in which the specific character CH3 is not displayed. The winning probability of the production is set. Further, in the game cycle in which the specific character CH3 is displayed on the external display device 301 after the specific character CH3 is displayed on the pattern display device 41, the specific character CH3 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 and the specific character CH3 is displayed on the external display device 301. The winning probability of the effect is set so that the degree of expectation for transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the degree of expectation for occurrence of ready-to-win are higher than in game times in which the character CH3 is not displayed.

According to the second embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A command for executing an effect corresponding to the effect for a game round in the external device EX is output not from the main side MPU 62 but from the sound and light side MPU 82 . This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the main MPU 62 . Further, although the main MPU 62 determines the general content of the game-playing effects, the sound and light-side MPU 82 determines the details of the game-playing effects. In this case, by outputting the command to the external device EX by the sound and light side MPU 82, the command can be output so as to specify the entire content of the effect for the game round. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect related to the entire content of the effect for the game round on the external display device 301 .

As a command for executing a reproduction effect on the external display device 301, a stop result command and a pattern command transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 82 to the display side MPU 92 when the immediately preceding game cycle is started are output. As a result, not only the success/failure determination result, the distribution determination result, and the display duration included in the variation command, but also the content of the advance notice lottery processing and the content of the stop pattern determination processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 82 are supported. It is possible to externally output the command to the external device EX, and in the reproduction performance, it is possible to reproduce exactly the same content as the performance for the game cycle executed immediately before.

Further, by outputting the stop result command and the pattern command as they are as described above, there is no need to prepare a dedicated command for executing the reproduction effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the types of commands.

In the configuration in which the stop result command and the pattern command are transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 82 to the display side MPU 92 by serial communication, the stop result command and the pattern command are externally output from the sound and light side MPU 82 to the external device EX by serial communication. . This makes it possible to externally output the stop result command and the pattern command using the processing configuration for transmitting commands to the display side MPU 92 . Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for externally outputting the command.

In response to the timing when the specific character CH3 is no longer displayed on the pattern display device 41, the sound and light side MPU 82 externally outputs an exit command to the external device EX, and the external display device 301 externally outputs the exit command. At the same time, the display of the specific character CH3 is started. As a result, it is possible to perform a mutual effect as if the specific character CH3 is moving between the pattern display device 41 and the external display device 301. It is possible to increase the player's attention to both. In addition, since the exit command is output from the sound and light side MPU 82 that controls the execution of the effect, not the main side MPU 62, it becomes easier to specify the output timing of the exit command, and the configuration for performing the external output is simplified. is planned.

In the configuration in which the command corresponding to the content of the effect is externally output from the sound and light side MPU 82 as described above, the signal corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 is externally output from the main side MPU 62 . As a result, it becomes possible to distribute the subject of the external output according to the functions of the MPUs 62 and 82, so that the external output can be preferably performed.

The same external terminal board 79 is used when the main side MPU 62 performs external output and when the sound and light side MPU 82 performs external output. As a result, it becomes possible to concentrate the parts for outputting information to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 on the external terminal board 79, and it becomes easy to perform wiring work for external output.

<Third Embodiment>
In the third embodiment, unlike the first embodiment and the second embodiment, both the main side MPU 62 and the sound/light side MPU 82 transmit signals to the external device EX. However, while the sound and light side MPU 82 transmits commands to the external device EX by serial communication as in the second embodiment, the main side MPU 62 does not transmit commands to the external device EX, A single signal line is used to transmit the start-of-variation signal. A processing configuration for outputting a signal to the external device EX in the main side MPU 62 and the sound and light side MPU 82 will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

First, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 43, the external output processing at the start of fluctuation executed by the main MPU 62 will be described.

In step S2501, the generation lottery of the interlocking production is executed, and in the following step S2502, it is determined whether or not the result of the generation lottery is the generation winning of the interlocking production. If a negative determination is made in step S2502, this external output processing is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2502, the process proceeds to step S2503.

In step S2503, the command correspondence table is read out from the main-side ROM 63, and in subsequent step S2504, the content of the variation command output this time to the sound and light side MPU 82 is specified. After that, in step S2505, it is determined whether or not the current game round is the game round corresponding to the small hit result, and in step S2506, whether the state is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. determine whether or not As a result of each of these determination processes, if the state is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode and the current game round is a small hit result, the process proceeds to step S2508, otherwise, step Proceed to S2507.

The processing contents of steps S2501 to S2506 are the same as steps S1701 to S1706 of the external output processing (FIG. 32) at the start of fluctuation in the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, in the command correspondence table, the external command at the start of variation is not set in one-to-one correspondence with the variation command, but rather in one-to-one correspondence with the variation command. The ON duration period of the start signal is set. That is, in the present embodiment, the external MPU 312 can specify the content of the interlocking effect by making the ON duration of the fluctuation start signal different.

In step S2507, the ON continuation period corresponding to the variation command output this time to the sound and light side MPU 82 is read from the command correspondence table. On the other hand, in step S2508, the ON continuation period set one address lower than the ON continuation period corresponding to the variation command output to the sound and light side MPU 82 this time is read from the command correspondence table. Here, in the command correspondence table, the variation command set one address lower than one variation command has a common effect content different from the common effect content of the former variation command. In addition to being set, the common effect content is effect content that cannot be selected by the sound and light side MPU 82 based on the former variation command. Therefore, in step S2508, the ON continuation period corresponding to the variation command transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 in the current game round and the variation command that does not match the performance content is selected.

After executing the process of step S2507 or step S2508, the process advances to step S2509 to transmit the fluctuation start signal to the external device EX in the ON duration selected in step S2507 or step S2508. After that, the external output processing is terminated.

In the external MPU 312, the data table corresponding to the ON continuation period of the fluctuation start signal is read from the program ROM 313 to the work RAM 314, and the effect corresponding to the read data table is executed on the external display device 301. An internal command is output to the external VDP 315 . As a result, when an effect is executed in a mode corresponding to the ON duration period selected in step S2507, an advance notice effect regarding the content of the effect for the game round executed by the symbol display device 41 is externally attached. It is executed by the display device 301 . On the other hand, when an effect is executed in a mode corresponding to the ON continuation period selected in step S2508, the content of the effect for the game round executed by the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301 are displayed. A player is notified of the high-probability mode when a discrepancy occurs with the interlocking effect of the game cycle to be executed.

Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 44, the master-side command correspondence processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 82 will be described.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 62. If these commands have been received, in step S2602, processing for determining the stop result command and pattern command is executed. are stored in the RAM 84 on the sound and light side, and the stop result command and the pattern command are transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S2604. The processing contents of these steps S2602 to S2604 are the same as steps S2207 to S2209 of the master side command correspondence processing (FIG. 40) in the second embodiment.

If a negative determination is made in step S2601, or if the process of step S2604 is executed, it is determined in step S2605 whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If an opening command has been received, an opening handling process is executed in step S2606, and an opening command is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in subsequent step S2607.

In the following step S2608, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2608, a reproduction lottery process is executed in step S2609, and it is determined in step S2610 whether or not a reproduction lottery has been won. In the case of a repeat winning, in step S2611, the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in the game cycle immediately before the current open/close execution mode are transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication. A first opening command is transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication. As a result, the external MPU 312 starts the opening effect of the opening/closing execution mode on the external display device 301, and after the end of the opening effect, the effect performed on the symbol display device 41 in the previous game round is displayed. , the display of the external display device 301 is controlled so that the reproduction effect of the game cycle is performed on the external display device 301 .

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2608, or if a negative determination is made in step S2610, then in step S2612 a second opening command is transmitted to the external device EX via serial communication. As a result, the external MPU 312 controls the display of the external display device 301 so that the normal bonus effect is performed.

If the process of step S2611 or step S2612 has been executed, other processes are executed in step S2613, and then this master side command handling process ends. The processing contents of steps S2605 to S2613 are the same as steps S2210 to S2218 of the main-side command handling processing (FIG. 40) in the second embodiment.

According to the third embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Regarding the execution of the reproduction effect in the external device EX, the same effects as in the second embodiment are obtained.

A command for executing a reproduction effect in the external device EX is externally output from the sound and light side MPU 82, while the external display device 301 outputs the effect corresponding to the effect when starting the effect for the game round. Information to be performed in is externally output from the main side MPU 62 . Since the timing at which the game cycle occurs is arbitrary and the content of the effect for the game cycle is also arbitrary, it is not possible to prepare in advance the content to be externally output. In this case, the main MPU 62 existing on the upstream side of the control externally outputs the information for starting the effect for the game cycle, so that the interlocked effect for the game cycle on the external display device 301 can be performed early. It is possible to start. Also, it is possible to distribute the function of externally outputting to the external device EX according to the function of each of the MPUs 62 and 82 .

When the sound and light side MPU 82 externally outputs information corresponding to the effect for the game round, the plurality of terminals of the external terminal plate 79 are used to externally output as a command, whereas the main side MPU 62 outputs the information for the game round. When information corresponding to the effect is output to the outside, it is output as a signal using only one terminal of the external terminal plate 79 . This makes it possible to flexibly deal with the diversification of the types of information to be output to the outside.

The main MPU 62 changes the type of information to be externally output to the external device EX by varying the ON continuation period of the fluctuation start signal. This makes it possible to output a plurality of types of information to the outside even when the information is output to the outside using one terminal.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, unlike each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is not provided with the symbol display device 41 . Instead, the external display device 301 of the external device EX functions as the pattern display device 41 in each of the above embodiments. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 45 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 and the external device EX in this embodiment.

The external device EX is provided above the pachinko machine 10 as in the above embodiments. While the external device EX is fixed in each of the above-described embodiments, the external device EX is movable in this embodiment. The external device EX is provided with a pair of left and right movable arms 321 and 322, and the movement direction is restricted by the movable arms 321 and 322 so that the external device EX can move in the vertical direction. It's becoming Then, the external device EX is placed above the pachinko machine 10 at an initial position where it does not overlap the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction, and at a position adjacent to the window panel 52 of the pachinko machine 10. It is displaceable between a use position facing from the front.

When the external device EX is placed at the use position, the display surface of the external display device 301 is placed at a position including the center position in the vertical direction and the center position in the horizontal direction of the window panel 52 . In this case, there are non-opposing areas of the window panel 52 above, laterally and below the external display device 301, and these non-opposing areas are in the game area PA on the game board 24 where game balls flow down. facing from the front. That is, the external display device 301 exists in the central area of the game area PA.

The external display device 301 is formed using transparent liquid crystal so that the rear of the external display device 301 can be seen through. Therefore, even when the external display device 301 is placed at the use position, it is possible to see through the window panel 52 facing behind it and the game area PA facing further behind it.

A plurality of external operation units 302 are provided laterally of the display surface of the external display device 301 on the front surface of the external device EX. All of these external operating units 302 are arranged outside the window panel 52 so as not to face the window panel 52 from the front when the external device EX is arranged at the use position. An external control board 311 is built in the side portion of the external device EX on which the external operation unit 302 is provided. The area where the external control board 311 is provided is a position that does not face the window panel 52 from the front when the external device EX is placed at the use position, and is located on the window panel 52 side of the front door frame 14 . It is a position facing the square area from the front.

Next, the configuration of the game board 24 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

The game board 24 is not provided with the symbol display device 41 unlike the above embodiments. Instead, a large number of nails 24b are provided at the position where the pattern display device 41 was provided. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner in which game balls flow down in the game area PA more than in the above-described embodiments.

A stage unit 325 is provided above the first operation opening 33 in the game area PA. A ball entry section 326 is provided on the upper side of the stage unit 325 to allow game balls to flow into the stage unit 325. It rolls laterally on the stage 327 . And the game ball discharged from the lateral center position of the stage 327 outside the stage unit 325 enters the first operation opening 33 more than the game ball discharged from other positions of the stage unit 325. It's getting easier.

In the situation where the external device EX is arranged at the use position, the external display device 301 exists in front of the stage unit 325 and the area where the nail 24b is provided in the game area PA. As already explained, since the external display device 301 is made of transparent liquid crystal, even when the external device EX is placed at the use position, the game area PA and the stage unit located behind it can be displayed. 325 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, an electrical configuration for communication among the pachinko machine 10, the external device EX and the hall computer HC will be described.

As shown in FIG. 47, the main MPU 62 can transmit various signals to the MPU 201 of the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 79 . The types of signals transmitted to this hall computer HC are the same as in the first embodiment. Also, the main MPU 62 can transmit commands to the external device EX through the external terminal board 79 by serial communication. The communication method of this serial communication is the same as in the case of the first embodiment.

In addition, the master side MPU 62 can transmit commands to the sound and light side MPU 82 by serial communication. The communication method for this serial communication is the same as the communication method for transmitting a command to the external device EX by serial communication. A signal line for command data transmission, a signal line for clock signal, and a signal line for latch signal are provided as a group of signal lines.

Here, in this embodiment, the display control device 90 is not provided in response to the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is not provided with the symbol display device 41 . Therefore, the sound and light side MPU 82 controls the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 based on the command received from the main side MPU 62, but does not transmit the command toward the lower side. Further, in each of the above embodiments, the sound and light side MPU 82 determines the content of the performance for the execution time of the performance corresponding to the command based on the command received from the main side MPU 62, but the data corresponding to the entire execution time The table is read by the display side MPU 92, and based on the command transmitted from the display side MPU 92 according to the data table, the sound and light side MPU 82 controls the execution of the performance in a part of the performance range of the execution time. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, based on the command received from the main MPU 62, the content of the effect for the execution time of the effect corresponding to the command is determined, and the data table corresponding to the entire execution time is generated. It is read by the light side MPU 82, and the performance execution control is performed in the sound and light side MPU 82 according to the read data table.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is not provided with the symbol display device 41, and instead, the function of the symbol display device 41 is achieved in the external display device 301 of the external device EX. Correspondingly, the program ROM 313 of the external device EX stores a program and fixed value data that enable the external display device 301 to perform an effect corresponding to the command transmitted from the main MPU 62. ing. In addition, since the function of the pattern display device 41 in each of the above-described embodiments is fulfilled in the external display device 301, the contents of the effect executed by the external display device 301 are the display light emitting unit 53 and the It must be related to the content of the presentation executed by the speaker unit 54 . Therefore, in this embodiment, the main MPU 62 transmits the same command as the command transmitted to the sound and light MPU 82 to the external MPU 312 .

For example, when a variation command and a type command are transmitted from the main side MPU 62 to the sound and light side MPU 82 at the start of a game cycle, the same variation command and type command are transmitted from the main side MPU 62 to the external side MPU 312. be. Also, when an opening command is transmitted from the main side MPU 62 to the sound and light side MPU 82 at the start of the opening/closing execution mode, the same opening command is transmitted from the main side MPU 62 to the external side MPU 312 . The types of commands transmitted from the main MPU 62 are the same as in the first embodiment.

When the external MPU 312 receives a command from the main MPU 62 , the data table corresponding to the command is read from the program ROM 313 to the work RAM 314 . Then, by generating and outputting an internal command to the external VDP 315 according to the contents of the data table, the external display device 301 is caused to execute a display presentation according to the contents of the data table. This data table corresponds to the data table read from the same command in the sound and light side MPU 82. For example, if it is a data table for game times, the data table read out in the external MPU 312 and the sound and light side MPU 82 The display continuation time of the game cycle is the same as that of the data table read out in . Then, when the data table for the game cycle is read out, the symbols are variably displayed on the external display device 301 over the display continuation time determined by the main MPU 62 . The contents of the variable display of the symbols are the same as the contents of the display of the symbol display device 41 in each of the above-described embodiments.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, based on the command transmitted from the main MPU 62, the sound and light MPU 82 and the external MPU 312 independently determine the effect content. In this case, if there is a high degree of freedom regarding the determination of the effect content, the effect content executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 and the effect content executed by the external display device 301 are inconsistent. may occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, the main MPU 62 determines even the detailed contents of the presentation. For example, if it is an effect for the game round, the notice lottery process (step S1204) and the effect pattern determination process (step S1206) executed by the sound and light side MPU 82 in the first embodiment are executed by the main side MPU 62. Then, variation commands based on these processing results are transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 and the external MPU 312 respectively.

As already described, the external device EX is provided with the external operation unit 302 operated by the player to display various information. Correspondingly, the program ROM 313 stores a program and fixed value data for displaying various information on the external display device 301 according to the operation of the external operation unit 302 .

Next, command output processing executed by the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, the command output process includes the fraud detection process (step S205), the input state monitoring process (step S212), the special figure special electric control process (step S213), and the general figure general electric In the control process (step S214), it is executed when it becomes necessary to transmit a command from the main side MPU 62 to the sound and light side MPU 82. FIG.

First, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not it is time to output a command. If a negative determination is made in step S2701, this command output processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2701, the process proceeds to step S2702. In step S2702, a command corresponding to the current output timing is read from the main ROM 63, and in step S2703, the read command is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 by serial communication. The same command as the command sent to the side MPU 82 is externally output to the external device EX through serial communication. After that, the command output processing ends.

Next, the external control processing executed by the external MPU 312 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the external control process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) in the external MPU 312 .

In the external control process, first, in step S2801, master-side command storage process is executed. The main-side command storage process is a process for storing the command in the work RAM 314 when a command is received from the main-side MPU 62 . The work RAM 314 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. They are read out sequentially according to the order.

In the subsequent step S2802, master-side command handling processing is executed. In the master-side command correspondence process, the data table corresponding to the command received from the master-side MPU 62 is read from the program ROM 313 to the work RAM 314 .

In the subsequent step S2803, the hall side information corresponding to the signal received from the MPU 201 of the hall computer HC is stored in the work RAM 314. FIG. The signal received from the MPU 201 is a signal corresponding to the signal externally output from the pachinko machine 10 corresponding to the external device EX to the hall computer HC. , information on the number of times the game is played, information on the number of game balls to be paid out, and the like are transmitted to the external device EX.

In subsequent step S2804, display control processing is executed. In the display control process, according to the data table read out to the work RAM 314, an internal command is output to the external VDP 315 each time the image is updated. The external VDP 315 outputs an image signal to the external display device 301 according to the received internal command. As a result, a display effect corresponding to the data table is executed on the external display device 301 . The contents of the display control process are the same as those of the task process of step S1305 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 24) of the display side MPU 92 in the first embodiment.

Thereafter, in step S2805, it is determined whether or not the external operation unit 302 has been manually operated, and in step S2806, it is determined whether or not the game round or opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2805, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2806, this external control processing ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2805 and a negative determination is made in step S2806, then in step S2807 control processing corresponding to the operation is executed, and then this external control processing ends. In the control processing corresponding to operation, processing for displaying various information corresponding to the operation of the external operation unit 302 on the external display device 301 is executed.

According to the fourth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The pachinko machine 10 does not have the symbol display device 41, and instead, the external display device 301 functions as the symbol display device 41 in each of the above embodiments. As a result, the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

Further, since the pattern display device 41 is not provided in the game area PA, it is possible to secure a wide area in which the game ball flows down in the game area PA. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner in which game balls flow down.

The sound emission control device 80 is provided in a configuration in which the pattern display device 41 and the display control device 90 are defective. As a result, light emission control of the display light emission unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are performed by the audio light emission control device 80 . In this case, the main side MPU 62 externally outputs to the external side MPU 312 the same command as the command transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 . As a result, it is possible for the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to execute the display effect executed by the external display device 301 and the corresponding effect. In addition, it becomes possible to share commands, and to reduce the types of commands.

The external device EX is displaceably provided in front of the window portion 51 of the pachinko machine 10 at a position facing the window portion 51 . As a result, it is possible to play a game while improving the visibility of the external display device 301 .

In addition, since the external display device 301 is made of transparent liquid crystal, even when the external display device 301 is arranged in front of the window portion 51, the player can see how the game balls flow down in the game area PA. It is possible to make it visible.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing contents of the production pattern determination processing executed in step S1206 of the master side command correspondence processing (FIG. 22) in the sound and light side MPU 82 are different from those in the above embodiments. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the effect pattern determination process.

First, in step S2901, a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a loop effect in the current game round is executed. A loop effect means that when performing an effect to display a special character as an effect for a game round, the type of the special character is changed between a plurality of game rounds, and the special character is displayed between a plurality of game rounds. It is an effect in which a change is made in a predetermined order when the types are changed, and the change cycle is repeated in the predetermined order. More specifically, when the special character A, the special character B, and the special character C are set as the special characters, the special character A is selected in one game round to be executed in the loop effect. In this case, the special character B is selected in the next game round to be executed for the loop performance, the special character C is selected in the next game round to be the loop performance target, and then the loop performance is to be executed. A special character A is selected in the game round. Then, selection of the type of special character is repeated in a predetermined order such as special character A→special character B→special character C→special character A→special character B→ . . .

In the following step S2902, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S2901 is the generation winning of the loop effect. In the case of winning of generation of loop effect, in step S2903, it is determined whether or not the value of the loop effect counter provided in the sound and light side RAM 84 is a value larger than 2. The loop effect counter is a counter for determining which special character to use when executing the loop effect. Specifically, when the value of the loop effect counter is "0", the special character A is selected, and when the value of the loop effect counter is "1", the special character B is selected. is "2", special character C is selected.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2903, the value of the loop effect counter is cleared to "0" in step S2904. If a negative determination is made in step S2903, or if the process of step S2904 is executed, it is determined in step S2905 whether or not the current mode is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. Also, in step S2906, it is determined whether or not the current game round is a small winning result.

If a negative determination is made in step S2905, or if a negative determination is made in step S2906, then in step S2907 a special character of a type corresponding to the value of the current loop effect counter is selected for the current loop effect. Select as character. As a result, in the current game round, a loop effect is performed using a special character of a type corresponding to the value of the loop effect counter.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in both step S2905 and step S2906, that is, in the state of high probability mode and low frequency support mode, in the case of a small hit result game round, in step S2908 , a special character of a kind corresponding to a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the current loop performance counter is selected as a character for the current loop performance. For example, when the current loop effect counter value is "1", the special character C corresponding to the case where the loop effect counter value is "2" is selected, and the current loop effect counter value is "1". 2", the special character A corresponding to the case where the value of the loop effect counter is "0" is selected. As a result, the rules of the selection order of the special characters in the loop effect are broken, and the player can be notified of the high-probability mode.

When the process of step S2907 or step S2908 is performed, 1 is added to the value of the loop effect counter in step S2909. If a negative determination is made in step S2902, or if the process of step S2909 is executed, other processes are executed in step S2910, and then the effect pattern determination process is terminated. In the other processing, regarding the determination of the effect pattern, processing for determining contents other than the contents related to the loop effect is executed.

According to the fifth embodiment described in detail above, when a small hit result occurs in the state of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the rule of the selection order of the special characters in the loop effect is broken. becomes. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode by utilizing the occurrence of the rule breaking. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the loop effect.

In addition, by performing the above-mentioned notification triggered by the result of the small win, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage of the result of the small win and increase the player's expectation for the result of the small win. It becomes possible.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing contents of the production pattern determination processing executed in step S1206 of the master side command correspondence processing (FIG. 22) in the sound and light side MPU 82 are different from those in the above embodiments. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the processing for determining the effect pattern.

First, in step S3001, lottery processing is executed to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect in the current game round. The pre-announcement effect refers to a situation in which symbols are variably displayed in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or symbols are standby-displayed in one symbol row Z1 and symbols are variably displayed in the remaining symbol rows Z1 and Z2. It is an effect in which a notice character is displayed in order to notify the degree of expectation that a ready-to-win effect will occur and the degree of expectation that a win result will occur in the relevant game round. A plurality of types of the notice character are set so as to include at least a character corresponding to the type of reach effect on a one-to-one basis, and when the notice character corresponding to the type of reach effect is displayed, basically In the game round, a ready-to-win performance corresponding to the notice character is generated.

In the subsequent step S3002, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S3001 is the occurrence winning of the pre-announcement effect. In the case of winning for generation of previous notice effect, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, the type of ready-to-win effect to be executed in the current game round is grasped from the content of the variation command received this time. In the subsequent step S3004, the type of foretelling character corresponding to the type of ready-to-win effect grasped in step S3003 is grasped.

Thereafter, in step S3005, it is determined whether or not the state is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and in step S3006, it is determined whether or not the current game round is a small hit result. do.

If a negative determination is made in step S3005, or if a negative determination is made in step S3006, then in step S3007 a pre-announcement effect is set in which the type of foretold character ascertained in step S3004 is displayed. As a result, in the current game round, after the pre-announcement effect in which a predetermined notice character is displayed is executed, a ready-to-win effect corresponding to the predetermined notice character, for example, a ready-to-win effect in which the predetermined notice character appears is executed. be.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in both steps S3005 and S3006, that is, in the state of the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, in the case of a game turn that results in a small hit, in step S3008 , a pre-announcement effect is set in which a kind of foretelling character different from the kind of foretelling character grasped in step S3004 is displayed. As a result, in the current game round, after the pre-announcement effect in which a predetermined notice character is displayed is executed, a ready-to-win effect not corresponding to the predetermined notice character, for example, a reach effect in which the predetermined notice character does not appear is executed. be done. In this case, a violation of the rule occurs between the pre-announcement effect and the ready-to-win effect, and it is possible to notify the player of the high probability mode.

When the process of step S3007 or step S3008 is executed, other processes are executed in step S3009, and then the effect pattern determination process is terminated. In the other processing, regarding the determination of the effect pattern, processing for determining contents other than the contents related to the loop effect is executed.

According to the sixth embodiment described in detail above, in the case of a small hit result in the state of high probability mode and low frequency support mode, the law of the corresponding relationship between the notice character and the character of the ready-to-win effect will collapse. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode by utilizing the occurrence of the rule breaking. Therefore, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the effect using the preview character.

In addition, by performing the above-mentioned notification triggered by the result of the small win, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage of the result of the small win and increase the player's expectation for the result of the small win. It becomes possible.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually or in combination with the configuration of the above-described embodiment.

(1) Information may be output from the pachinko machine 10 to the external device EX so that an effect corresponding to the effect of the open/close execution mode in the pachinko machine 10 is executed. In this case, for example, as an effect of the opening and closing execution mode, the symbol display device 41 displays a stop result in a mode in which it is not possible to specify which of the low probability mode and the high probability mode the jackpot result corresponds to in the effect for the game round. In the event that a promotion effect is performed with the possibility of displaying a display clearly indicating that it corresponds to the transition to the high-probability mode during the opening and closing execution mode, the effect corresponding to the promotion effect is displayed externally. A configuration performed by the device 301 may be employed. In this case, the external display device 301 may be configured to display the content indicating the degree of expectation in the promotion effect, which clearly indicates that the transition to the high-probability mode is supported.

(2) The pachinko machine 10 side draws a lottery to determine whether or not the interlocking effect of the game cycle executed on the external display device 301 is executed based on the external command or the fluctuation start signal output from the pachinko machine 10 at the start of the fluctuation. Instead of the configuration where the execution is performed, a configuration may be adopted in which the lottery as to whether or not the execution is performed is performed on the external device EX side. Moreover, it may be configured such that a lottery as to whether or not the game is executed is performed on both the pachinko machine 10 side and the external device EX.

In addition, the interlocking effect of the game round is configured to be executed with a predetermined probability when a predetermined ready-to-win effect is executed in the effect for the game round on the pattern display device 41, or when the predetermined ready-to-win effect is executed. may be

(3) The external command at the start of variation may be a command including part of the data included in the variation command. For example, as in the first embodiment, the variation command has identification data for indicating that it is a variation command by the upper 4-bit data of the 2-byte data. The following 4-bit data sets lottery result data corresponding to the results of win/fail judgment processing and sorting judgment processing, and the remaining 8-bit data sets time data corresponding to the display duration. In such a configuration, time data may be extracted from the variation command, and data indicating that it is an external command at the start of variation may be added to the data as the external command at the start of variation. In this case, in the external device EX, by making it possible to specify the common effect content from the time data indicating the display duration time, the external display device 301 can display the effect for the game round based on the external command at the start of the fluctuation. It is possible to execute a production corresponding to.

(4) The external command at the start of fluctuation may be configured to include data indicating the result of determination of suitability, or in addition or alternatively, may be configured to include data indicating the result of allocation determination. good. Alternatively, the variation command may be used as it is as the external command at the start of variation. In this case, since the variation command can be used as it is, the data capacity can be reduced.

(5) A configuration may be adopted in which data indicating the content of effects common to the effects for game rounds that can be derived from the command for variation is set in the command for variation. In this case, the data of the common effect content may be extracted from the variation command, and data indicating that it is an external command at the start of variation may be added to the data as the external command at the start of variation. This makes it possible to use the variation command when deriving the external command at the start of variation.

(6) As an external command at the start of fluctuation, a command indicating that a highly expected ready-to-win effect that will result in a big win will be executed is externally output, but a premium effect that confirms that a big win will result is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which the command indicating that is not output to the outside. As a result, it is possible to prevent the external output of the command indicating that the result will be a big win as the external command at the start of the variation.

(7) In the interlocking effect of the external display device 301, a character that is the same as or corresponding to the character displayed in the ready-to-win effect of the game round effect on the pattern display device 41 is displayed before the start of the ready-to-win effect. However, instead of this, the character may be displayed simultaneously with the start of the ready-to-win effect or after the start of the ready-to-win effect. In this case, the interlocking effect functions not as a pre-notification effect of the content of the ready-to-win effect in the pattern display device 41 but as an emphasizing effect of the content of the ready-to-win effect in the pattern display device 41 .

(8) The command for executing the interlocking effect on the external display device 301 may be configured to be externally output from the display side MPU 92 . For example, the stop result command and the pattern command received from the sound and light side MPU 82 may be configured to be externally output from the display side MPU 92, and either one of the stop result command and the pattern command, more specifically, only the pattern command is displayed. It may be configured to be externally output from the side MPU 92 . Further, a command corresponding to the stop result command and the pattern command and corresponding to a part of the effect range of the effect for the game cycle may be externally output from the display side MPU 92 .

(9) In order to execute an interlocking effect on the external display device 301, the stop result command and the pattern command may be externally output from the sound and light side MPU 82, either one of the stop result command and the pattern command, More specifically, only the pattern command may be externally output from the sound and light side MPU 82 .

(10) In the above-described first embodiment, at least one of the advance notice lottery process and the stop symbol determination process performed by the sound and light side MPU 82 may be configured to be performed by the main side MPU 62 . For example, when the main MPU 62 executes the stop symbol determination process, the variation command includes information on the stop symbol. Then, when the variation command is externally output to the external device EX, the external side MPU 312 of the external device EX can grasp the stop pattern of the pattern display device 41. When the device 301 executes the reproduction performance of the game cycle, it is possible to make the types of final stop symbols and ready-to-win symbols correspond to the performance for the game cycle.

Further, not only the stop symbol determination process but also the notice lottery process is executed by the main side MPU 62, so that the variation command includes the information for the whole effect for the game cycle. Then, when the variation command is externally output to the external device EX, the external MPU 312 can grasp the entire effect for the game round, so the external display device 301 can be used to play the game. When executing the reproduction performance for the game round, it is possible to reproduce the entire performance for the game round.

(11) A variation command may be output from the sound and light side MPU 82 in order to cause the external display device 301 to reproduce the game round. Further, in order to cause the external display device 301 to execute the reproduction effect of the game round, the stop result command and the pattern command may be externally output from the display side MPU 92 . In addition, in order to execute the reproduction effect of the game round on the external display device 301, either one of the stop result command and the pattern command, more specifically, only the pattern command is externally output from the sound and light side MPU 82 or the display side MPU 92. It may be configured to be

(12) Reproduction on the external display device 301 in the opening/closing execution mode in which the number of round games is equal to or greater than a predetermined number when there is an opening/closing execution mode with a different number of round games as the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode. It is good also as composition which can perform production. For example, when there are a high-frequency winning mode opening/closing execution mode in which the number of round games is 16 times and an opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode 8 times, the latter opening/closing execution mode has a reproduction effect. While not executed, in the former opening and closing execution mode, the reproduction effect may be executed.

(13) A configuration may be adopted in which an effect for a game round whose display duration is equal to or less than a predetermined time is subject to execution of a reproduction effect on the external display device 301 . For example, if it is the open/close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode, a high-frequency side reference time is set corresponding to it, and the display duration time that is less than the high-frequency side reference time is reproduced. Make it a target for execution of production. In addition, if it is the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the corresponding low-frequency side reference time is set, and the display duration time that is less than the low-frequency side reference time is reproduced. Make it a target for execution of production. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the reproduction effect is executed.

(14) In the reproduction effect on the external display device 301, only a part of the effect range in the effect for the game round may be executed. For example, it may be configured to execute the effect range after the symbols are standby-displayed in the symbol row whose switching order to the standby display is first, or it may be configured to execute the effect range after the start of the ready-to-win effect. A configuration may be adopted in which the performance range after the start of the super ready-to-win performance is executed.

(15) In the reproduction effect on the external display device 301, only the character displayed in the ready-to-win effect in the effect for the game cycle is displayed, and the fluctuation display of the symbols and the ready-to-win effect itself may not be reproduced. In this case, the external command at the start of variation, which is output to the external display device 301 to execute the interlocking effect, may be externally output to execute the reproduction effect on the external display device 301. good.

(16) The output timing of the command externally output from the pachinko machine 10 to execute the reproduction effect on the external display device 301 is not limited to the start of the opening/closing execution mode, It may be when the measurement of the final stop time is started, it may be when the final stop time has passed, it may be during the opening performance of the opening and closing execution mode, and the timing when the first opening time of the special electric prize winning device 32 is started. It may be later.

(17) When the external display device 301 executes the display effect of the reproduction effect, the sound output may be reproduced accordingly. In this case, the sound output for reproduction performance may be performed by the external device EX, or may be performed by the speaker section 54 of the pachinko machine 10 .

(18) A rule-breaking effect in which the content of the game round effect on the pattern display device 41 and the content of the interlocking effect on the external display device 301 do not match, is not the game round resulting in the small win, but the predetermined reach. It may be configured to occur in a game cycle in which an effect occurs and results in a loss. In this case, it is possible to provide a rule-breaking effect as compensation for the fact that the ready-to-win effect is off. In addition, the effect of this configuration is enhanced by making it occur when the ready-to-win effect with a predetermined degree of expectation or more fails.

(19) A rule-breaking effect in which the content of the game round effect on the pattern display device 41 and the content of the interlocking effect on the external display device 301 do not match is the number of times the game cycle continues in a situation where no big win result occurs. It may be configured to occur when the reference number of times or more is reached. In this case, it is possible to provide a rule-breaking presentation as compensation for the fact that the big winning results do not occur in succession.

(20) Although the content of the performance for the game round on the symbol display device 41 and the content of the interlocking performance on the external display device 301 usually do not match, it is notified that the mode is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the contents of both presentations match as a violation of the rule of the case.

(21) The content of the interlocking effect executed by the external display device 301 is a rule-breaking effect in which the content of the game round effect on the pattern display device 41 and the content of the interlocking effect on the external display device 301 do not match. , but may be configured to adjust the content of the performance for the game cycle executed by the pattern display device 41. FIG.

(22) In a situation where the symbol display device 41 is executing the game round effect, the external display device 301 may execute the completely same effect as the game round effect. For example, when the perfect match effect is performed, it may be configured to determine the occurrence of a ready-to-win effect that is more than a predetermined degree of expectation, or may be configured to determine the occurrence of a jackpot result, and is a high probability mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the occurrence of the jackpot result of the high-frequency support mode is confirmed. In addition, as the interlocking effect of the external display device 301, an effect corresponding to the entire effect for the game round is performed as described above, and as the reproduction effect of the external display device 301, a part of the effect range in the effect for the game round is performed. It may be configured such that an effect corresponding to is performed.

(23) In the fourth embodiment, instead of the configuration in which various commands are externally output from the main side MPU 62 to the external side MPU 312, a configuration in which various commands are externally output from the sound and light side MPU 82 to the external side MPU 312. may be In this case, a command based on the contents of the notice lottery process and the stop pattern determination process executed by the sound and light side MPU 82 is externally output to the external side MPU 312, and the sound and light side MPU 82 responds to the externally output command. The display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 are controlled in such a manner. Therefore, it is possible to execute the light emission effect corresponding to the display effect for the game round on the external display device 301 by the display light emitting unit 53, and the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect is produced by the speaker unit 54. It is possible to run

(24) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the upper region of the window panel 52 of the front door frame 14 in the longitudinal direction is retracted further to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 than the lower region. A configuration may be adopted in which the window panel 52 does not interfere with the external device EX when the external device EX is placed in the position, and the external device EX can be positioned further inside.

(25) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured without the speaker unit 54 so that the function of sound output is achieved by the external device EX. In this case, since the display effect and the sound output effect are executed in the external device EX, further simplification of the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is achieved.

(26) The reference count for ending the high-probability mode is not limited to those in the above embodiments, and is arbitrary. For example, the end reference number of times in the high probability mode when the result of the explicit high probability jackpot result and the reference number of times of ending the high probability mode when the result of the non-explicit high probability jackpot result are different. The number of ending reference times may be larger or smaller in the case of the jackpot result than in the case of the non-explicit high-probability jackpot result.

In addition, multiple types of explicit high-probability jackpot results may be set so that the standard number of times for ending the high-probability mode is different, and multiple types of non-explicit high-probability jackpot results are set so that the standard number of times for ending the high-probability mode is different. may be set. In addition, at least one of the explicit high-probability jackpot result and the non-explicit high-probability jackpot result may be configured such that the high-probability mode termination reference count is smaller than at least one advantageous jackpot result, and the probability is higher than any of the advantageous jackpot results. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of mode end criteria is large.

In addition, as a non-explicit high-probability jackpot result, another non-explicit high-probability jackpot result that is a high-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode when it occurs in a situation of a high-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode. may be set. In this case, the other non-explicit high-probability jackpot result may have a higher or fewer high-probability mode end reference count than the non-explicit high-probability jackpot result of each of the above embodiments.

(27) As at least a part of the jackpot result, there is a jackpot result in which the high probability mode triggers the transition to the high frequency support mode, and the end reference count of the high probability mode and the end reference count of the high frequency support mode are different. The configuration may be set. In this case, there may be a jackpot result in which the standard end count of the high probability mode is greater than the standard end count of the high frequency support mode, and the standard end count of the high probability mode is the end of the high frequency support mode. There may be jackpot results that are less than the reference number of times. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to further diversify the mode of transition of the game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

(28) The result of the lottery process of the effect for informing the degree of expectation for the standard number of times for ending the high-probability mode is not executed by the external device EX but by the pachinko machine 10 side. By externally outputting a command corresponding to to the external device EX, an effect for notifying the degree of expectation may be executed on the external display device 301 . In this case, the effect for notifying the degree of expectation on the side of the pachinko machine 10 and the effect for notifying the degree of expectation on the side of the external device EX are individually subjected to lottery processing of the content of the effect. By doing so, the player is provided with a plurality of types of information for predicting the reference number of times for ending the high-probability mode, and the player can make advanced predictions about the reference number of times for ending.

(29) Regarding notification of the reference number of endings in the high-probability mode, if the situation is the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to clearly indicate the reference number of endings. For example, the symbol display device 41 may clearly indicate the end reference number of times, and the end reference number of times may be subtracted and displayed each time a game round is completed. Further, in this configuration, the external display device 301 may also clearly indicate the end reference number of times. Conversely, in the external display device 301, the end criterion number of times is not specified. The external display device 301 may be configured to provide notification in a notification mode corresponding to .

(30) A communication system conversion circuit is provided between the pachinko machine 10 and the external MPU 312, and the conversion circuit converts commands externally output from the pachinko machine 10 into a communication system receivable by the external MPU 312. may be configured. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 externally outputs a command through serial communication, the conversion circuit may convert the command into a parallel format. Also, when the pachinko machine 10 outputs a command through parallel communication, the conversion circuit may convert the command into a serial format.

(31) When the opening/closing execution mode occurs, information corresponding to the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode may be externally output to the external device EX. In this case, a plurality of types of opening and closing execution modes with different numbers of round games are set, and from the operation of the pachinko machine 10, it is impossible or difficult to identify which round game is in the opening and closing execution mode. An effect for notifying the degree of expectation that the number of round games is large in EX may be executed. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect for notifying the degree of expectation is executed on both the pachinko machine 10 and the external device EX.

(32) Instead of transitioning from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode when the number of completed game rounds reaches the end reference number, the transition may not occur depending on the number of completed game rounds. That is, when the high-probability mode is entered, the high-probability mode may be continued at least until the next big win result occurs.

(33) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a plurality of standard numbers of times for ending the high-frequency support mode when the low-probability mode is changed to the high-frequency support mode are set. In this case, from the operation of the pachinko machine 10, it is configured that it is impossible or difficult to identify which end reference number is, and it is expected that the end reference number of times in the high-frequency support mode is a large number in the external device EX. You may make it perform the production|presentation for alerting|reporting a degree. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect for notifying the degree of expectation is executed on both the pachinko machine 10 and the external device EX.

(34) In the case of executing an effect for a game cycle, the variation command and the type command are transmitted from the main side MPU 62 to the sound and light side MPU 82, but the type command may not be transmitted. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which an additional command indicating whether or not to execute a pseudo-continuation is transmitted separately from the command for variation. In this case, the variation command defines a base display duration, and the additional command defines an additional display duration with respect to the base display duration. As a result, the master side MPU 62 decides by lottery whether or not to execute additional effects such as quasi-ream and the type of additional effects to be executed, and the result of the determination is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82. Even if this is the case, the data about the effect transmitted from the main side MPU 62 is distributed to the command for variation and the additional command, so it is possible to suppress the data capacity of each command.

In the above configuration, when a command is externally output from the main MPU 62 to cause the external device EX to execute the interlocking effect or the reproduction effect of the game round, the command to be output externally is the variation command and the additional command Of these, only the additional command may be externally output, the command corresponding to the additional command may be externally output, or only the variation command may be externally output, and the variation command may be configured to externally output a command corresponding to , both may be configured to be externally output, or a configuration may be configured to externally output a command corresponding to both commands.

(35) By accumulating the types of effects executed by the symbol display device 41 on the pachinko machine 10 side and externally outputting a command corresponding to the accumulation result to the external device EX, the accumulation result can be handled. A configuration may be adopted in which the effect is executed on the external display device 301 .

(36) When the pachinko machine 10 issues an abnormality notification or status notification, the corresponding command may be output to the external device EX. In this case, the external display device 301 can also perform abnormality notification and status notification.

(37) In the above-described first embodiment, the configuration may be such that commands are externally output from the main MPU 62 to the external device EX by parallel communication. Further, in the second embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which commands are transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 82 to the display side MPU 92 by parallel communication. In this case, the command may be output from the sound and light side MPU 82 to the external device EX through parallel communication, or the command may be output through serial communication.

(38) The number of times of opening and closing of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode of each pattern and the setting pattern of the opening mode are not limited to those in each of the above embodiments, and the operation described individually in each of the above embodiments. It is optional as long as at least one of the effects can be achieved.

In addition, the upper limit number of each round game is not limited to those in each of the above embodiments, and can be any number as long as at least one of the effects individually described in each of the above embodiments can be achieved. is. Further, the upper limit number may be different depending on the type of the round number regulation mode, or the upper limit number may be different between the round games of the same round number regulation mode.

In addition, the opening mode in the short-time mode is not limited to those in each of the above embodiments, and is equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball, and the firing cycle of the game ball x n (n = 1, 2, 3) The following time may be set. Also, by making the open duration longer than the game ball firing cycle, it is possible to substantially win a prize to the special electric prize winning device 32, but the open duration is the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number during the round game. may be shorter than the product of , or may be the same. Even in this case, the possibility that the special electric prize winning device 32 will win the upper limit number of prizes for the round game under the condition that the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened in a short time mode is reduced.

(39) In a round game in which only the special electric winning device 32 is opened in a short time mode, instead of a configuration in which the winning of the upper limit number of game balls set for the round game does not occur substantially, the upper limit A configuration may be adopted in which a number of game balls can win a prize. For example, the opening duration of the special electric prize winning device 32 is set to a time longer than the firing cycle of the game ball (for example, in the range of 0.6 sec to 64 sec), and the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed according to the open duration and the opening mode. The product of the number of times is the same or substantially the same as the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of round games, or 1 to 2 times or 1 to 3 times the product The value of In this case, depending on how the game balls flow down in the game area, the winning of the maximum number of game balls may or may not occur.

(40) As the short-time mode, a plurality of types of short-time modes may be set so that the operation mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 looks the same although the exact duration of opening is different. For example, the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the result of the non-explicit big win and the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the result of the small win have the same appearance of the operation mode of the special electric prize winning device 32, but are selected in each opening and closing of the special electric prize winning device 32. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the type of the short-time mode is different.

(41) The value of the high-probability counter may be set to "0" while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, regardless of the content of the high-probability counter before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the win/fail lottery mode is set to the low probability mode during the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, the timing of clearing the high probability counter to "0" may be the timing at which the stop display in the mode corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is started in the special figure display unit 37a. It may be the start timing, the timing in the middle of the opening time of the opening/closing execution mode, or the end timing of the opening performance of the opening/closing execution mode. However, in this configuration, when executing the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, it is not possible to determine the win/fail lottery mode before transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode from the contents of the high probability counter. Therefore, when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, it is preferable to execute a data storage process that enables the determination of the winning/failure lottery mode before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

(42) The value of the high-frequency counter may be set to "0" while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, regardless of the content of the high-frequency counter before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. Even in this case, the support mode is set to the low-frequency support mode during the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, the timing of clearing the high frequency counter to "0" may be the timing at which the stop display in the mode corresponding to the transition to the opening and closing execution mode is started in the special figure display unit 37a, and the opening and closing execution mode It may be the start timing, the timing in the middle of the opening time of the opening/closing execution mode, or the end timing of the opening performance of the opening/closing execution mode. However, in this configuration, when executing the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, it is not possible to determine the support mode before transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode from the contents of the high-frequency counter. Therefore, when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, it is preferable to execute a data storage process that enables the specification of the support mode before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

(43) Although the special electric prize winning device 32 is completely closed while the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed, a partial area of the special electric prize winning device 32 may not be closed. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a game ball can enter the special electric prize winning device 32 through a part of the area even when the game ball is closed. , it may be configured such that winning of game balls to the special electric winning device 32 is not possible.

(44) In place of the configuration in which the winning of game balls to the second operating port 34 is disabled while the general electrical accessory 34a is closed, the second operating port 34 is entered even when the general electrical accessory 34a is closed. It is good also as a structure which can generate a winning prize of a game ball. However, the ease of winning the prize must be lower than that during the opening of the universal electrical accessory 34a.

(45) As the lottery mode, there is not only a high probability mode and a low probability mode, but also a medium probability mode in which the probability of winning a jackpot is lower than in the high probability mode and the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the low probability mode. It is good also as a structure with. As the middle probability mode, for example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability mode (eg 1/nn is an integer of 1 or more) and the probability of winning in the low probability mode (eg 1/mm is an integer of 1 or more) integer m>n) (for example, 1/(n+(m−n)/2)), may be a higher probability than the intermediate probability, or a lower probability than the intermediate probability good too.

(46) As the support mode, not only the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, but also the frequency of winning the second operation port 34 is lower than the high-frequency support mode and the frequency of the second operation port 34 is lower than the low-frequency support mode. A medium frequency support mode with a high winning frequency may be provided.

(47) The operation means capable of informing that the high probability mode is on is not limited to the symbol display device 41 that performs variable display of symbols in each game round, and is dedicated to the notification. It may be a display device, a movable decorative member, or a light emitting part such as an LED.

(48) As the opening mode of the special electric prize winning device 32, it may be configured such that there is a middle time mode in which the opening duration is shorter than the long time mode and longer than the short time mode.

(49) The hold information acquired by the occurrence of the winning in the first operation opening 33 and the holding information acquired by the occurrence of the winning in the second operation opening 34 are stored separately. A configuration may be applied in which the retained information on the side of the second operating port 34 is preferentially digested, or conversely, a configuration may be applied in which the retained information on the side of the first operating port 33 is preferentially digested. Well, regardless of whether it is the first working port 33 or the second working port 34, a configuration may be applied in which the acquisition order is digested.

In the above construction, the first working opening 33 and the second working opening 34 may be arranged side by side instead of vertically arranging the working openings. A configuration in which the mouths are arranged obliquely may be used. Furthermore, both working ports 33 and 34 are spaced apart so that only winning to the first working port 33 or only winning to the second working port 34 can be aimed according to the operation mode of the firing operation device 28. may be configured.

Further, in the above configuration, the special figure display unit 37a, the first display area for displaying the result of the validity determination of the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first operating port 33, the winning to the second operating port 34 You may provide the 2nd display area which displays the result of the propriety determination of the pending|holding information acquired based on. In this case, prior to the pending information acquired based on the winning of the first operation port 33 being the target of the winning judgment or based on the winning judgment, the pattern variation in the first display area As soon as the display is started, the stop result corresponding to the success/failure determination is displayed, and the variable display for one game round is terminated. In addition, prior to the reservation information acquired based on the winning of the second operation port 34 becoming the target of the win/loss determination or based on the target of the win/fail determination, the pattern fluctuation display in the second display area is started, the stop result corresponding to the win/loss determination is displayed, and the variation display for one game round is terminated.

(50) When the hold information acquired due to the occurrence of the winning to the first operation port 33 is the target of the judgment, and the hold information acquired due to the occurrence of the winning to the second operation port 34 It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the profit that the player obtains differs depending on whether or not is the target of the judgment. For example, when the hold information on the first operation port 33 side is the target of the win/fail judgment, the game results are sorted as in the above embodiment, but the hold information on the second actuation port 34 side is used for the win/fail judgment. In the case of winning a jackpot as an object, it may be arranged to be distributed to one of an advantageous jackpot result, an explicit high-probability jackpot result, and a low-probability jackpot result.

Moreover, in the configuration in which a plurality of operation ports are provided as in the above embodiment, the number of operation ports is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, a configuration in which only one operating port is provided may be employed.

(51) Display control based on a command transmitted from the main controller 60 instead of the configuration in which the display controller 90 is controlled by the sound emission control device 80 based on the command transmitted from the main controller 60 The device 90 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 80 . Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 80 and the display control device 90 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be may be integrated into the main controller 60 , or both functions of both controllers may be integrated into the main controller 60 . Also, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 80 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 80 to the display control device 90 are arbitrary.

(52) The device that executes the game round effect is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and is configured to execute the game round effect by operating a movable decorative member. Alternatively, a configuration may be employed in which an effect for a game round is executed by lighting a predetermined light-emitting portion, or a configuration may be employed in which an effect for a game round is executed by combining all or part of the above-described modes. good.

(53) In the above embodiment, the stop result corresponding to each game result is displayed in the special figure display unit 37a, but instead of this, the special figure display unit 37a may be defective, and any Even if it is a game result, a common stop result may be displayed in the special figure display unit 37a. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is not possible to identify which game result is from the display of . Further, in the above-described embodiments, the special figure display unit 37a repeats the display of a predetermined pattern regardless of the result of the judgment and the distribution judgment, so that the reach display and the reach production are not executed, and the final stop Although it was configured to notify the results of the success/failure determination and the distribution determination according to the results, the reach display and the reach performance may be performed in the special figure display unit 37a, and the reach performance is performed in the game round in which the reach performance occurs. A stop result different from the game round that does not occur may be configured to be displayed in the special figure display section 37a.

(54) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a jackpot is obtained when a coin is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, a mahball, or the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. Benefit lottery means for executing privilege lottery processing for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player (function for executing special figure fluctuation start processing in main side MPU 62);
Benefit granting means for granting a benefit to the player when the privilege is awarded in the privilege lottery process (function for executing the processing of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
Production processing execution means for executing production processing for executing production corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery processing (function for executing special figure fluctuation start processing in main side MPU 62, sound and light side MPU 82 and display side MPU 92);
External output means for outputting information corresponding to the processing result of the effect processing to the outside of the game machine (in the first embodiment, external output processing at the start of fluctuation in the main side MPU 62 and external output setting processing at the time of bonus start) in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound and light side MPU 82; in the third embodiment, the function of executing external output processing at the start of fluctuation in the main side MPU 62; a function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound and light side MPU 82, a function of executing the process of step S2704 in the main side MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A1, since the information corresponding to the result of the effect processing is output to the outside of the game machine, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process beyond the frame of the game machine alone. Become. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature A2. The external output means outputs predetermined information (external command at the start of fluctuation) that is information corresponding to the processing result of the performance processing and does not include information that clearly indicates the result of the privilege lottery processing ( In the first embodiment, the main MPU 62 has a function of executing external output processing at the start of fluctuation. In the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2206 in the sound and light side MPU 82. In the third embodiment, the sound and light The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized by comprising a function of executing the process of step S2611 in the side MPU 82, or a function of executing the process of step S2704 in the main side MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment.

According to feature A2, in a configuration in which an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process can be executed outside the gaming machine, the predetermined information does not include information that clearly indicates the result of the privilege lottery process. It is possible to suppress the act of trying to abuse the result of illegally reading the. Also, it is possible to prevent the result corresponding to the privilege lottery process from being taught outside the gaming machine before being taught by the gaming machine.

Feature A3. There are a plurality of types of privileges granted by the privilege granting means,
A2 characterized in that the predetermined output means outputs the predetermined information without including not only the information specifying the result of the privilege lottery process but also the information specifying the type of the privilege. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature A3, since the predetermined information does not include information that clearly indicates the type of privilege, it is possible to suppress an act of abusing the result of illegally reading the predetermined information. Further, it is possible to prevent the information specifying the type of privilege from being taught outside the gaming machine before being taught by the gaming machine.

Feature A4. Equipped with production execution means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54 or pattern display device 41) capable of executing production,
The effect processing execution means is a predetermined effect control means ( a function of executing light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the sound and light side MPU 82, and a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92),
The external output means does not include information indicating the result of the privilege lottery process at a timing before the performance content of the predetermined performance becomes the performance content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, but the predetermined performance. Predetermined output means for outputting predetermined information (external command at the start of fluctuation) including information corresponding to the content of In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2206 in the sound and light side MPU 82; in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2611 in the sound and light side MPU 82; The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized by comprising a function of executing processing.

According to feature A4, since the predetermined information is output at the timing before the performance content of the predetermined performance becomes the performance content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, during the execution of the predetermined performance, it is possible to correspond to the predetermined performance. It is possible to execute the effect to be performed by an external effect means provided outside the game machine. In addition, since the predetermined information does not include information that clearly indicates the result of the privilege lottery process, it is possible to suppress an act of misusing the result of illegally reading the predetermined information. Also, it is possible to prevent the result corresponding to the privilege lottery process from being taught outside the gaming machine before being taught by the gaming machine.

Feature A5. The predetermined output means uses, as the predetermined information, information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect, and is executed as the predetermined effect both when the privilege is awarded in the privilege lottery process and when it is not won. The gaming machine according to feature A4, characterized in that it outputs information corresponding to the content of the effect to be obtained.

According to the feature A5, while making it possible to execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect using the predetermined information outside the game machine, it is impossible to grasp the result of the privilege lottery process from the predetermined information. Become.

Feature A6. The predetermined effect control means causes the effect execution means to execute the predetermined effect over a predetermined duration,
Characteristic A4, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the predetermined information without including not only the information indicating the result of the privilege lottery process but also the information indicating the predetermined duration. Or the gaming machine described in A5.

According to feature A6, it is possible to reduce the number of types of predetermined information compared to a configuration in which information specifying a predetermined duration is included in the predetermined information, thereby simplifying the configuration for outputting the predetermined information. becomes possible.

Feature A7. The predetermined output means outputs, as the predetermined information, information corresponding to a part of the performance range included in the predetermined performance, rather than the information that enables the entire contents of the predetermined performance to be specified. The game machine according to any one of features A4 to A6, characterized in that

According to feature A7, since the predetermined information includes information corresponding to a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect, the effect corresponding to the part of the effect range is transmitted outside the gaming machine. can be executed by the external effect means. Also, it is possible to simplify the configuration for outputting the predetermined information.

Feature A8. The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the predetermined information common to the plurality of types of predetermined effects.

According to feature A8, it is possible to reduce the number of types of predetermined information, and to simplify the configuration for outputting the predetermined information.

Feature A9. The predetermined effect control means can select a plurality of types of effect contents for a predetermined effect determining element derived from the result of the privilege lottery process as the effect content of the predetermined effect, and derives from the predetermined effect determining element. The effect content is selected so that the predetermined effect to be performed includes the common effect content,
The gaming machine according to feature A7 or A8, wherein the predetermined information output by the predetermined output means includes information specifying the common effect content.

According to feature A9, since the predetermined information includes information that specifies the common performance content, it is possible to execute the performance corresponding to the predetermined performance even in a situation where the overall content of the predetermined performance has not been determined. It is possible to output the predetermined information to the outside. As a result, the degree of freedom regarding the output timing of the predetermined information is improved, and it becomes possible to facilitate the design of the configuration for outputting the predetermined information.

Feature A10. A specific control means (main side MPU 62) having the privilege lottery means,
The effect processing executing means determines the effect contents of the predetermined effect based on the fact that the specific control means (main side MPU 62) has transmitted control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process as the effect processing. Effect content determination means (in the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound and light side MPU 82, and in the second embodiment, the processing of step S2207 in the sound and light side MPU 82 is executed function, in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2602 in the sound and light side MPU 82),
The gaming machine according to feature A8 or A9, wherein the predetermined effect determining element corresponds to the content of the control information.

According to the characteristic A10, it is possible to execute an effect by the effect execution means so as to correspond to the content of the control information received from the specific control means, and the external effect means provided outside the game machine. It is possible to execute the production in

Feature A11. The gaming machine according to feature A10, wherein the specific control means has the predetermined output means.

According to the characteristic A11, since the specific control means present on the upstream side of the control has the function of outputting predetermined information to the outside of the game machine, it is possible to integrate the function of managing the operation of the game machine into the specific control means. becomes.

Feature A12. The effect content determination means includes effect lottery means (in the first and fourth embodiments, sound and light side The function of executing the processing of steps S1204 and S1206 in the MPU 82, the function of executing the processing of step S2207 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the processing of step S2602 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment. functions to execute),
The effect lottery means executes the effect content lottery process in a mode corresponding to the type of the control information, and the predetermined effect that can be selected for one of the control information has a common effect content. It is intended to execute the production content lottery process so as to be included,
The predetermined information includes information specifying the common effect content,
The specific control means includes correspondence information storage means (main-side ROM 63 in the first and third embodiments; 2. The game machine according to feature A11, characterized by comprising a sound and light side ROM 83).

According to feature A12, a plurality of types of presentation contents can be selected for one piece of control information transmitted from the specific control means, thereby suppressing an increase in the number of types of control information and diversifying the presentation contents of the predetermined presentation. become possible. In this case, in the effect content lottery process executed by the predetermined effect control means, common effect contents are included in the predetermined effect that can be selected for one piece of control information. As a result, in the configuration in which the effect content of the predetermined effect is diversified while suppressing an increase in the types of control information as described above, the specific control means externally outputs the predetermined information corresponding to the common effect content, An effect corresponding to the predetermined effect can be performed by an external effect means outside the game machine. Further, since the specific control means stores specific correspondence information capable of specifying the correspondence relationship between the type of control information and the type of predetermined information, the predetermined information can be easily identified from the control information transmitted by itself. becomes possible. Therefore, simplification of the process for outputting predetermined information is achieved.

Feature A13. Equipped with production execution means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54 or pattern display device 41) capable of executing production,
The effect processing execution means is a predetermined effect control means ( A function of executing light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the sound and light side MPU 82, and a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92),
The external output means is a specific output means (a main side The function of executing the external output setting process at the start of the bonus in the MPU 62, the function of executing the process of step S2216 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the process of step S2611 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the feature A13, even if the player misses the predetermined effect in the effect executing means, it is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to check the effect corresponding to the predetermined effect again. In addition, in the case where the effects are executed with the time shifted such that the game machine side is the front side and the game machine external side is the rear side, it is possible to relate the contents of these effects.

Feature A14. The gaming machine according to feature A13, wherein the specific output means outputs the specific information after the predetermined effect is completed in the effect executing means.

According to the feature A14, it is possible to prevent the effect outside the gaming machine based on the external output of the specific information and the predetermined effect in the effect executing means from overlapping in terms of time. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to each effect.

Feature A15. The gaming machine according to feature A14, wherein the specific information includes information that enables specification of the entire contents of at least a part of the effect contents of the predetermined effect.

According to the feature A15, it is possible to reproduce at least part of the entire performance range of the performance contents of the predetermined performance in the external performance means provided outside the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who missed the part of the performance range with an opportunity to check the part of the performance range again.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to feature A14 or A15, wherein the specific information includes information that enables specification of the entire effect content of the predetermined effect.

According to the characteristic A16, it is possible to reproduce the entire contents of the predetermined effect in the external effect means provided outside the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who missed the predetermined effect with an opportunity to check the predetermined effect again.

Feature A17. A specific control means (main side MPU 62) having the privilege lottery means,
The effect processing executing means determines the effect contents of the predetermined effect based on the fact that the specific control means (main side MPU 62) has transmitted control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process as the effect processing. Effect content determination means (in the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound and light side MPU 82, and in the second embodiment, the processing of step S2207 in the sound and light side MPU 82 is executed function, in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2602 in the sound and light side MPU 82),
The specific output means is used as the specific information to determine the content of the predetermined effect in the control information or the control information that triggered the decision of the content of the predetermined effect corresponding to the output of the specific information. The game machine according to any one of features A13 to A16, wherein the game machine outputs information including information to be played.

According to feature A17, in a configuration in which an effect corresponding to a predetermined effect can be executed by an external effect means outside the game machine, control information transmitted by the specific control means is used as the specific information to be output to the outside of the game machine. becomes possible.

Feature A18. The specific control means, as the control information, is information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, the first control information ( command for variation) is transmitted to the effect content determination means, and second control information (type command), which is information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, is transmitted to the effect content determination means separately from that. ,
The specific output means outputs, as the specific information, the first control information or information including information used for determining the content of the predetermined effect in the first control information, while outputting the second control. The gaming machine according to feature A17, which does not output information containing information.

According to feature A18, by transmitting both the first control information and the second control information from the specific control means, it is possible to carefully confirm the result of the privilege lottery process in the performance content determination means. . In this case, while the first control information or information corresponding thereto is output to the outside of the game machine as specific information, the second control information is not output to the outside. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of information output to the outside while making it possible to execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect outside the gaming machine.

Feature A19. The gaming machine according to feature A17 or A18, wherein the specific control means has the specific output means.

According to the characteristic A19, since the specific control means present on the upstream side of the control has a function of outputting specific information to the outside of the game machine, it is possible to integrate the function of managing the operation of the game machine into the specific control means. becomes.

Feature A20. The effect processing execution means includes, as the effect processing, effect content determination means for determining the effect content of the predetermined effect (in the first and fourth embodiments, the processing of steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound and light side MPU 82 is performed. function to execute, a function to execute the processing of step S2207 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function to execute the processing of step S2602 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment),
The game machine according to any one of features A13 to A19, wherein the specific output means is included in the effect content determination means.

According to the feature A20, since the specific information is externally output from the effect content determination means, the specific information is externally output so as to be able to specify the entire effect content of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to reproduce the entire predetermined effect in the external effect means provided outside the game machine.

Feature A21. The privilege granting means shifts the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player as granting the privilege when winning the privilege grant in the privilege lottery process,
Controlling the performance executing means or other means so that a special performance corresponding to the special game state is executed after the predetermined performance is executed when the privilege is awarded in the privilege lottery process. Special effect control means (function of executing the processing of steps S1211 to S1220 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2210 to S2218 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment , in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2605 to S2613 in the sound and light side MPU 82),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A20, wherein the specific output means outputs the specific information when the special effect is started.

According to feature A21, when the special game state is being executed in the game machine, the external effect means outside the game machine can execute the effect corresponding to the previous predetermined effect. This makes it possible to improve the interest in the game during the special game state. In addition, when reproducing at least a part of the performance range of the predetermined performance in the external performance means outside the game machine, the predetermined performance to be reproduced was performed before the transition to the special game state. It becomes easier for the player to recognize that it is a predetermined effect.

Feature A22. As the special game state, the first special game state (opening and closing execution mode of high frequency winning mode) whose duration is relatively long, and the second special game state (low frequency winning mode) whose duration is relatively short open/close execution mode) is set,
The characteristic A21, wherein the specific output means outputs the specific information when the first special game state is entered, and does not output the specific information when the second special game state is entered. The game machine described.

According to the feature A22, since the specific information is externally output when a state with a relatively long duration of the first special game state and the second special game state is started, an effect for reproducing the predetermined effect When the period for performing is ensured, the production will be executed.

Feature A23. The gaming machine according to feature A21 or A22, wherein the specific output means outputs the specific information in the case of the special game state in which the duration is longer than the duration of the predetermined effect. .

According to the feature A23, the external effect means executes the effect when the period for performing the effect for reproducing the predetermined effect is secured.

Feature A24. The external output means provides related effect information (external effect information at the start of variation) for enabling external effect means (external device EX) existing outside the gaming machine to execute an external effect corresponding to the processing result of the effect process. command, variation command) (function for executing external output processing at the start of variation and external output setting processing at the start of bonus in the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment; second embodiment) Then, the function of executing the processing of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound and light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the external output processing at the start of fluctuation in the main side MPU 62 and the processing of step S2611 in the sound and light side MPU 82 are performed. A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A23, characterized in that it has a function to execute the processing of step S2704 in the main side MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment.

According to the feature A24, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process in the external effect means existing outside the gaming machine. As a result, it becomes possible to execute an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process beyond the framework of the single gaming machine, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature A25. Equipped with production execution means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54 or pattern display device 41) capable of executing production,
The effect processing execution means is a predetermined effect control means ( A function of executing light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the sound and light side MPU 82, and a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92),
Characteristic A24 characterized in that the relational output means outputs the relational effect information in order to enable the external effect corresponding to the predetermined effect to be executed in a situation where the predetermined effect is being executed. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature A25, the external effect means executes the external effect corresponding to the predetermined effect in a situation where the predetermined effect is being executed, so that mutually related effects can be performed at the same time, and the effect is executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to both the means and the external presentation means.

Feature A26. A specific control means (main side MPU 62) having the privilege lottery means,
The effect processing executing means determines the effect contents of the predetermined effect based on the fact that the specific control means (main side MPU 62) has transmitted control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process as the effect processing. Effect content determination means (in the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound and light side MPU 82, and in the second embodiment, the processing of step S2207 in the sound and light side MPU 82 is executed function, in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2602 in the sound and light side MPU 82),
The relational output means outputs, as the relational effect information, the control information or information including information used for determining the effect content of the predetermined effect in the control information. A gaming machine described in A25.

According to feature A26, in a configuration in which execution control of the predetermined effect is performed by the predetermined effect control means based on the control of the specific control means, it is possible to execute the external effect using the control information transmitted by the specific control means. becomes.

Feature A27. The gaming machine according to feature A26, wherein the specific control means has the relationship output means.

According to feature A27, since the specific control means present on the upstream side of control has the function of outputting predetermined information to the outside of the game machine, it is possible to integrate the function of managing the operation of the game machine into the specific control means. becomes. Further, it is possible to externally output the relation effect information by using the processing configuration for transmitting the control information in the specific control means.

Feature A28. A specific control means (main side MPU 62) having the privilege lottery means,
The performance processing executing means, as the performance processing, responds to the type of control information based on the fact that the specific control means (main side MPU 62) has transmitted control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery processing. effect content determination means (in the first embodiment, step S1204 in the sound and light side MPU 82 and The function of executing the processing of step S1206, the function of executing the processing of step S2207 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of step S2602 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment). prepared,
The relationship output means outputs information corresponding to the result of the effect content lottery process as the relationship effect information,
The game machine according to feature A25, wherein the effect content determination means has the relationship output means.

According to the feature A28, it is possible to externally output information based on the result of the effect content lottery process executed by the effect content determination means as the related effect information, so that the related effect corresponds to the entire predetermined effect. It is possible to perform the production. In addition, since the related performance information is externally output from the performance content determination means, the configuration for outputting the related performance information based on the result of the performance content lottery process can be simplified.

Feature A29. The external effect means is pattern display means for displaying a pattern in a variable manner,
Features A25 to A28, wherein the effect execution means is at least one of sound output means (speaker unit 54) for executing sound output effect and light emitting means (display light emitting unit 53) for executing light emission effect 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature A29, it is possible to perform a sound output effect or a light emitting effect related to the pattern display means provided outside the game machine in the game machine, and the effects in the game machine and each effect means outside the game machine can be mutually can be related to

Feature A30. The gaming machine according to any one of features A24 to A29, wherein the external effect means is in a mode corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process after executing the unit effect.

According to the feature A30, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process in the external effect means and to notify the result. As a result, even if the game machine does not have the performance means having these functions, the external performance means can perform the functions.

Feature A31. The display means for performing a ready-to-reach effect for teaching the player the degree of expectation of winning the privilege grant is defective,
The gaming machine according to feature A30, wherein the ready-to-win effect can be performed in the unit effect of the external effect means.

According to the characteristic A31, the configuration of the gaming machine is simplified because the gaming machine lacks the effect means having the function of executing the ready-to-win effect. In addition, since the function of executing the ready-to-win effect is performed by the external effect means, it is possible to provide the ready-to-win effect to the player.

Feature A32. The game machine according to any one of features A24 to A31, wherein the front part of the game machine is capable of disposing the external presentation means in front of the front part of the game machine.

According to the feature A32, when the external effect means is used as the effect means of the game machine, it is possible to arrange the external effect means at a position that is easily recognized by the player, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the external effect means. can be increased.

Feature A33. A window portion (window portion 51) is formed in the front portion of the game machine so that a game area formed inside the game machine can be viewed from the front of the game machine,
The gaming machine according to feature A32, wherein the front face of the gaming machine is capable of disposing the external presentation means at a position facing the window in front of the window.

According to the feature A33, it is possible to arrange the external effect means at a position that is easily visible to the player, and to increase the degree of attention to the external effect means.

Feature A34. Equipped with production execution means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54 or pattern display device 41) capable of executing production,
The effect processing execution means is a predetermined effect control means ( A function of executing light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the sound and light side MPU 82, and a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92),
The game machine is
When the gaming machine is in one of the predetermined state (the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) and the non-predetermined state, the effect in the effect executing means and the external effect. Corresponding control means (function of executing the processing of step S1707 in the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment, step S2507 in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment function) and
When the gaming machine is in the non-corresponding state, which is the other of the predetermined state and the non-predetermined state, the performance in the performance execution means does not correspond to the external performance in the external performance means. non-corresponding control means (a function of executing the processing of step S1708 in the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2508 in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A24 to A33, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A34, depending on whether or not the gaming machine is in the predetermined state, there may or may not be a correspondence between the performance in the performance execution means and the performance in the external performance means. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp or predict whether or not the game machine is in a predetermined state by confirming the correspondence relationship between the two performances, and to draw the player's attention to both the performance executing means and the external performance means. becomes possible. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved.

Feature A35. As game states, there are a first state (high-probability mode) in which rewards are relatively likely to be awarded to the player and a second state (low-probability mode) in which rewards are relatively difficult to be awarded to the player.
The predetermined state is a state that is the first state, and is a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish between the first state and the second state as the notification state of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to feature A34, characterized in that it is in a state of being set.

According to the feature A35, even in a situation where it is not possible to grasp whether or not the state of the gaming machine is the first state, by confirming the correspondence between the effects of the effect executing means and the external effect means, , is in the first state. In this case, the player pays attention to both the effect execution means and the external effect means in order to grasp whether or not the game is in the first state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Feature A36. The privilege lottery means has, as lottery modes, at least a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of winning the privilege is relatively high and low,
The predetermined state is a state in which the high-probability mode is set, and a state in which the player cannot or is difficult to distinguish between the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode as the notification state of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to feature A34, characterized in that it is in a state of

According to the characteristic A36, even in a situation where it is not possible to grasp whether the gaming machine is in the high probability mode or not, by confirming the correspondence between the effects of the effect executing means and the external effect means. , it becomes possible to grasp whether or not it is in the high-probability mode. In this case, the player pays attention to both the effect execution means and the external effect means in order to grasp whether the high probability mode is selected, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Feature A37. the relationship output means has the corresponding control means and the non-corresponding control means;
The correspondence control means outputs, as the relational effect information, information for making the external effect in the external effect means correspond to the effect in the effect executing means,
In any one of features A34 to A36, wherein the non-corresponding control means outputs information for not corresponding the external effect in the external effect means with the effect in the effect execution means as the relation effect information. The game machine described.

According to the feature A37, by adjusting the content of the performance in the external performance means, it is possible to create a situation in which both the performance of the performance execution means and the external performance means correspond and a situation in which they do not correspond. . Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the effects of the effect executing means and the external effect means without affecting the execution mode of the effect in the effect executing means.

Feature A38. A specific control means (main side MPU 62) having the privilege lottery means,
The effect processing executing means determines the effect contents of the predetermined effect based on the fact that the specific control means (main side MPU 62) has transmitted control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process as the effect processing. Effect content determination means (in the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound and light side MPU 82, and in the second embodiment, the processing of step S2207 in the sound and light side MPU 82 is executed function, in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2602 in the sound and light side MPU 82),
The gaming machine according to feature A37, wherein the effect content determining means grasps the duration of execution of the predetermined effect based on the control information.

According to feature A38, since the predetermined effect is executed over the execution continuation period corresponding to the control information transmitted from the specific control means, it is difficult to change the content of the effect. On the other hand, when changing the correspondence between the effects of the effect executing means and the external effect means, the effect content of the external effect means is changed. Therefore, when changing the correspondence relationship between both effects, the degree of freedom of the change mode is increased, and it is possible to suitably change the correspondence relationship between both effects.

Feature A39. When a specific event (minor win result) that can occur in the course of the game occurs, a state in which one of the corresponding control means and the non-corresponding control means is controlled is changed to a state in which the other is controlled. The gaming machine according to any one of features A34 to A38, which is modified.

According to feature A39, the change in the correspondence between the effects of the effect execution means and the external effect means is triggered by the occurrence of a specific event, so that the player can easily understand the trigger.

Feature A40. the state of the corresponding side is a state that is not the predetermined state, the state of the non-corresponding side is the predetermined state,
The non-corresponding control means, when the game machine is in the predetermined state, when a specific event (small hit result) that can occur in the course of the game occurs, the effect in the effect execution means and the The game machine according to any one of features A34 to A39, characterized in that the external effect in the external effect means is not associated with the external effect.

According to the feature A40, when a specific event occurs while the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, both the effects of the effect executing means and the external effect means do not correspond. As a result, the player who has confirmed that the two effects do not correspond can understand that the gaming machine is in the predetermined state, and can increase the degree of attention to the two effects.

Feature A41. The gaming machine according to feature A40, wherein in the external effect, an effect is performed in which the type of effect that will occur thereafter is notified in advance by the effect executing means.

According to the feature A41, in the external effect, advance notification of the effect of the effect executing means is performed, so that the player can predict or understand the content of the effect that will occur after that by confirming the external effect. . In this case, when a specific event occurs while the game machine is in a predetermined state, an event occurs in which the content of the prior notification performed as the external presentation and the content of the subsequent presentation performed by the presentation execution means do not match. do. A player who confirms this phenomenon not only recognizes that the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, but also feels unexpectedness in the mismatch between the two effects. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A42. variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) provided in a game area where game balls flow down and switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Variable ball entry control means for controlling opening and closing of the variable ball entry means (function for executing the processing of steps S309 to S311 in the main side MPU 62);
with
The privilege granting means shifts the game state to a state in which the opening/closing control is executed as granting the privilege when the privilege granting win is won in the privilege lottery process,
The privilege lottery means determines that it is a specific determination result (small win result) that does not change the mode that affects the player's profit before and after the end of the state although the transition to the state in which the opening/closing control is executed occurs. Equipped with a specific judgment means capable of judging,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A39 to A41, wherein the specific event is the result of the specific determination.

According to feature A42, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage for the player when a specific determination result is obtained. In addition, it is possible to use the specific determination result as a trigger for changing the correspondence relationship between the effects of the effect execution means and the external effect means. It becomes possible to achieve simplification.

Feature A43. The corresponding control means causes a character identical or corresponding to a character displayed by the effect executing means to be displayed by the external effect means,
Any one of the features A34 to A42, wherein the non-corresponding control means causes the external effect means to display a character that is different from or does not correspond to the character displayed by the effect execution means. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature A43, the correspondence between the effects of the effect executing means and the external effect means is changed by changing the type of characters to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the correspondence has been changed with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature A44. Production execution means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54 or pattern display device 41) capable of executing production,
a specific control means (main side MPU 62) having the privilege lottery means;
with
The effect processing execution means is
As the effect processing, the effect content determination means (in the second embodiment, the effect content determination means in the sound and light side MPU 82 a function of executing the processing of step S2207 (a function of executing the processing of step S2602 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment);
Predetermined effect control means (light emission control in sound and light side MPU 82) that controls the effect execution means so that a predetermined effect (effect for game round) is executed in a manner corresponding to the effect content determined by the effect content determination means a function of executing processing and sound output control processing, and a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92);
with
The external output means is a predetermined output means for outputting predetermined information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect in the effect execution means (in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound and light side MPU 82 , in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2611 in the sound and light side MPU 82),
The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A43, wherein the effect content determining means has the predetermined output means.

According to feature A44, since the predetermined information is externally output from the effect content determining means, the predetermined information is externally output so as to enable the entire effect content of the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means to be specified. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect or the like related to the entire effect content of the predetermined effect outside the game machine.

Feature A45. The predetermined output means is used as the predetermined information to determine the effect content of the predetermined effect in the control information or the control information that triggered the determination of the effect content of the predetermined effect corresponding to the output of the predetermined information. The gaming machine according to feature A44, wherein the gaming machine outputs information including information to be played.

According to feature A45, in a configuration in which an effect corresponding to a predetermined effect can be executed by an external effect means outside the game machine, control information transmitted by the specific control means is used as the predetermined information to be output to the outside of the game machine. becomes possible.

Feature A46. The specific control means, as the control information, is information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, the first control information ( command for variation) is transmitted to the effect content determining means, and second control information (type command), which is information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, is transmitted to the effect content determining means separately from that. ,
The predetermined output means outputs, as the predetermined information, the first control information or information including information used for determining the effect content of the predetermined effect in the first control information, while outputting the second control. The game machine according to feature A45, which does not output information.

According to feature A46, by transmitting both the first control information and the second control information from the specific control means, it is possible to carefully confirm the result of the privilege lottery process in the performance content determination means. . In this case, the first control information or information corresponding thereto is externally output as predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, while the second control information is not externally output. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of information output to the outside while making it possible to execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect outside the gaming machine.

Feature A47. The effect content determination means is effect lottery means for executing a effect content lottery process for determining the effect contents of at least a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect (in the second embodiment, the step in the sound and light side MPU 82 a function of executing the processing of S2207, a function of executing the processing of step S2602 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment),
The effect lottery means executes the effect content lottery process in a mode corresponding to the type of the control information,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A44 to A46, wherein the predetermined output means outputs, as the predetermined information, information corresponding to a result of the effect content lottery process.

According to the feature A47, it is possible to externally output information based on the result of the effect content lottery process, so it is possible to grasp the entire effect content of the predetermined effect in a device outside the game machine.

Feature A48. The effect content determining means is a corresponding information transmitting means for transmitting corresponding information (a stop result command and a pattern command) to a corresponding effect control means (display side MPU 92) when receiving the control information and executing the predetermined effect. (In the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2209 in the sound and light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2604 in the sound and light side MPU 82),
The corresponding effect control means controls the corresponding effect means (symbol display device 41) so that the corresponding effect corresponding to the corresponding information is executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of characteristics A44 to A47, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the corresponding information as the predetermined information.

According to feature A48, in the configuration in which the corresponding effect control means executes the corresponding effect based on the corresponding information transmitted from the effect content determining means, the corresponding effect information transmitted to the corresponding effect control means is externally transmitted as predetermined information. output. This eliminates the need to prepare the predetermined information as dedicated information, making it possible to reduce the required storage capacity. In addition, the processing configuration for outputting correspondence information can be used for externally outputting predetermined information, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature A49. A communication method (serial communication) in which the predetermined information is output by the predetermined output means is the same as a communication method (serial communication) in which the correspondence information is transmitted by the correspondence information transmission means. The gaming machine according to feature A49.

According to feature A49, it is possible to externally output the predetermined information by using the processing configuration for transmitting the corresponding information to the corresponding effect control means. Therefore, simplification of the processing configuration is achieved.

Feature A50. Any one of the features A44 to A49, wherein the predetermined output means outputs midway information (exit command) corresponding to the content of the performance during execution of the predetermined performance during execution of the predetermined performance. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature A50, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect by the external effect means provided outside the game machine during execution of the predetermined effect. In addition, since the configuration of feature A44 is provided and the effect content determination means is configured to output externally, it becomes easy to specify the timing of external output during the execution of the predetermined effect, and the configuration for performing the external output is simplified. is planned.

Feature A51. The specific control means includes specific side output means for outputting information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine (function for executing steps S602, S803, S809, S1010, etc. in the main MPU 62). The game machine according to any one of features A44 to A50, characterized in that

According to feature A51, in a configuration in which information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine is externally output by the specific control means, the external output of information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect executing means is performed by the effect content determining means. By doing so, it becomes possible to distribute the subject of the external output according to the function of each control means. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform external output suitably.

Feature A52. The gaming machine according to feature A51, wherein a communication method when the predetermined information is output by the predetermined output means is different from a communication method when the information is output by the output means on the specific side. .

According to the feature A52, the communication method differs depending on the type of information to be output to the outside, so that the information can be output to the outside according to the nature of the information, and the output to the outside can be preferably performed. .

Feature A53. The output means on the specific side outputs information through means for external output (external terminal plate 79),
The game machine according to feature A51 or A52, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the predetermined information through the external output terminal board.

According to the feature A53, it is possible to concentrate the parts for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine in the external output means. This makes it easier to perform wiring work for external output.

Feature A54. the output means on the specific side uses one terminal of the external output means when outputting one piece of information,
The game machine according to feature A53, wherein the predetermined output means utilizes a plurality of terminals of the external output means when outputting the predetermined information.

According to feature A54, the number of terminals for the specific control means to output the state of the gaming machine to the outside is one. , it is possible to reduce the number of terminals while simplifying the communication configuration for performing the external output. On the other hand, since there are a plurality of terminals for outputting the information corresponding to the content of the presentation by the presentation content determining means, it is possible to output the information as a command. This makes it possible to flexibly deal with the diversification of the types of information to be output to the outside.

Feature A55. Equipped with production execution means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54 or pattern display device 41) capable of executing production,
The effect processing execution means is a predetermined effect control means ( a function of executing light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the sound and light side MPU 82, and a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92),
The external output means is
First predetermined output means (main MPU 62 in the first embodiment) outputs first predetermined information including information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect when the first timing comes in relation to the predetermined effect. External output processing at the start of fluctuation, a function of executing the processing of step S2206 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the external output processing at the start of fluctuation in the main side MPU 62 in the third embodiment) When,
Second predetermined output means (main MPU 62 in the first embodiment) outputs second predetermined information including information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect when the second timing comes in relation to the predetermined effect. A function of executing the external output setting process at the start of the bonus, a function of executing the process of step S2216 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment. function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A54, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A55, the information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect is externally output as the first predetermined information and the second predetermined information at different timings. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to each timing by the external effect means provided outside the game machine, and it is possible to diversify the contents of the effect to be executed by the external effect means. .

Feature A56. The first predetermined output means outputs information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect at the first timing before the effect content of the predetermined effect becomes the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process. which outputs the first predetermined information including
The second predetermined output means includes information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect at the second timing after the timing when the content of the predetermined effect becomes the content of the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process. The gaming machine according to feature A55, wherein the gaming machine outputs the second predetermined information.

According to the feature A56, there is an opportunity to externally output the effect content of the effect execution means at the timing before and after the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process. As a result, it is possible to perform the performance in the external performance means in different modes according to whether or not the performance content corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery processing, thereby diversifying the performance in the external performance means. becomes possible.

Feature A57. The gaming machine according to feature A56, wherein the second predetermined information has a greater amount of information of the effect content of the predetermined effect that can be derived from the predetermined information than the first predetermined information.

In a situation where the performance contents of the predetermined performance executed by the performance executing means are not the performance contents corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, the function of executing the predetermined performance is not spoiled. It is not preferable for the external effect means to provide more information than necessary regarding the effect content of the predetermined effect. On the other hand, after the performance content of the predetermined performance has become the performance content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, even if a lot of information about the performance content of the predetermined performance is provided by the external performance means, the predetermined performance is not performed. This is preferable because it does not impair the function of execution, and on the contrary, it enables various effects to be performed by the external effect means. In such a situation, the second predetermined information has a greater amount of information on the effect content of the predetermined effect that can be derived from the predetermined information than the first predetermined information, so that an appropriate external effect can be obtained at each timing. It becomes possible to output.

Feature A58. The first predetermined output means uses, as the first predetermined information, information corresponding to a part of the performance range included in the predetermined performance, rather than the information that enables the entire content of the predetermined performance to be specified. which outputs
The second predetermined output means outputs, as the second predetermined information, information enabling the entire content of the predetermined performance to be specified, or information corresponding to a greater range of performance than in the case of the first predetermined information. The game machine according to any one of features A55 to A57, characterized in that

According to feature A58, since the first predetermined information is externally output, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect by the external effect means outside the game machine. becomes. In this case, it is possible to prevent the result of the privilege lottery process from being clearly indicated by the effect outside the game machine, and it is possible to prevent the function of executing the predetermined effect from being impaired. On the other hand, since the second predetermined information is output, the predetermined performance executed by the performance executing means can be reproduced by the external performance means, and the predetermined performance is presented to the player who missed the predetermined performance. It is possible to give an opportunity to check again.

Feature A59. The first predetermined output means outputs the first predetermined information common to the plurality of types of predetermined effects,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A55 to A58, wherein the second predetermined output means outputs the second predetermined information individually for the plurality of types of predetermined effects.

According to feature A59, when the first predetermined information is output to the outside, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to a common effect content for a plurality of types of predetermined effects by the external effect means. When the information is output to the outside, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to each predetermined effect by the external effect means.

Feature A60. The effect processing executing means can select a plurality of types of effect contents for a predetermined effect determining element as the effect content of the predetermined effect, while the predetermined effect derived from the predetermined effect determining element is common. effect content determination means for selecting the effect content so as to include the effect content of A function of executing the processing of step S2207 in the sound and light side MPU 82, and a function of executing the processing of step S2602 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment),
The first predetermined information includes information specifying the common effect content, but does not include information specifying non-common effect content,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A55 to A59, wherein the second predetermined information includes at least information specifying the non-common effect content.

According to feature A60, since the first predetermined information is externally output, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the common effect content in the predetermined effect by the external effect means outside the game machine. In this case, it is possible to prevent the result of the privilege lottery process from being clearly indicated by the effect outside the game machine, and it is possible to prevent the function of executing the predetermined effect from being impaired. On the other hand, since the second predetermined information is output, the predetermined performance executed by the performance executing means can be reproduced by the external performance means, and the predetermined performance is presented to the player who missed the predetermined performance. It is possible to give an opportunity to check again.

Feature A61. The first predetermined output means uses, as the first predetermined information, information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect, and the predetermined output means is information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect in the privilege lottery process whether or not the privilege is awarded. It outputs information corresponding to the content of the production that can be executed as a production,
The second predetermined output means, as the second predetermined information, is information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect, and corresponds to the content of the effect that differs depending on whether or not the privilege is awarded in the privilege lottery process. The game machine according to any one of features A55 to A60, wherein the game machine outputs information to be played.

According to the feature A61, since the first predetermined information is output, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect and not indicating the result of the privilege lottery process by the external effect means outside the game machine. . In this case, it is possible to prevent the result of the privilege lottery process from being clearly indicated by the effect outside the game machine, and it is possible to prevent the function of executing the predetermined effect from being impaired. On the other hand, since the second predetermined information is output, an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect and indicating the result of the privilege lottery process can be executed by the external effect means outside the game machine. In this case, the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means can be reproduced by the external effect means, and the player who missed the predetermined effect can be given an opportunity to reconfirm the predetermined effect. Become.

Feature A62. The first predetermined information does not include information specifying the result of the privilege lottery process, and the second predetermined information includes information specifying the result of the privilege lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of A55 to A61.

According to the feature A62, the external effect means outside the gaming machine performs effects in a mode in which the result of the privilege lottery process is not specified, and in a mode in which the result of the privilege lottery process is specified. It is possible to generate Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effects executed by the external effect means.

Feature A63. There are a plurality of types of privileges granted by the privilege granting means,
The first predetermined output means outputs the first predetermined information without including information specifying the type of the privilege,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A55 to A62, wherein the second predetermined output means outputs the second predetermined information including information specifying the type of the privilege.

According to feature A63, the external effect means outside the gaming machine can produce effects in which the type of privilege is not specified and in which the type of privilege is specified. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effects executed by the external effect means.

Feature A64. The predetermined effect control means causes the effect execution means to execute the predetermined effect over a predetermined duration,
The first predetermined output means outputs the first predetermined information without including information specifying the predetermined duration,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A55 to A63, wherein the second predetermined output means outputs the second predetermined information including information specifying the predetermined duration.

According to the feature A64, the external effect means outside the gaming machine performs the effect in a manner not based on the predetermined duration of the predetermined effect, and the case in which the effect is performed in a manner based on the predetermined duration of the predetermined effect. Each can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effects executed by the external effect means.

Feature A65. A specific control means (main side MPU 62) having the privilege lottery means,
The effect processing executing means determines the effect contents of the predetermined effect based on the fact that the specific control means (main side MPU 62) has transmitted control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process as the effect processing. Effect content determination means (in the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound and light side MPU 82, and in the second embodiment, the processing of step S2207 in the sound and light side MPU 82 is executed function, in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2602 in the sound and light side MPU 82),
The game machine according to any one of features A55 to A64, wherein the effect content determining means has the second predetermined output means.

According to feature A65, since the effect content determination means can easily grasp the details of the effect contents of the predetermined effect than the specific control means, the effect content determination means has the second predetermined output means, whereby the first predetermined information and the first predetermined information are obtained. 2) It becomes easy to make the amount of information about the effect content of the predetermined effect different from that of the predetermined information.

Feature A66. The effect content determining means is a corresponding information transmitting means for transmitting corresponding information (a stop result command and a pattern command) to a corresponding effect control means (display side MPU 92) when receiving the control information and executing the predetermined effect. (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1208 in the sound and light side MPU 82; in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2209 in the sound and light side MPU 82; in the third embodiment, the sound and light side A function to execute the processing of step S2604 in the MPU 82),
The corresponding effect control means controls the corresponding effect means so that a corresponding effect corresponding to the corresponding information is executed,
The gaming machine according to feature A65, wherein the second predetermined output means outputs the correspondence information as the second predetermined information.

According to feature A66, in the configuration in which the corresponding effect control means executes the corresponding effect based on the corresponding information transmitted from the effect content determining means, the corresponding effect information transmitted to the corresponding effect control means is the second predetermined information. is externally output as This eliminates the need to prepare the second predetermined information as dedicated information, making it possible to reduce the required storage capacity. Also, the processing configuration for outputting the correspondence information can be used for externally outputting the second predetermined information, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature A67. Characteristic A66, characterized in that the communication method used when the second predetermined information is output by the second predetermined output means is the same as the communication method used when the correspondence information is transmitted by the correspondence information transmission means. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature A67, it is possible to output the second predetermined information to the outside by using the processing configuration for transmitting the corresponding information to the corresponding effect control means, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature A68. The game machine according to any one of features A65 to A67, wherein the specific control means has the first predetermined output means.

According to feature A68, since the specific control means externally outputs the first predetermined information and the effect content determination means externally outputs the second predetermined information, the subject of the external output is distributed according to the function of each control means. becomes possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform external output suitably.

Feature A69. The gaming machine according to feature A68, wherein the first predetermined output means and the second predetermined output means output information through the same external output means (external terminal plate 79).

According to feature A69, it is possible to concentrate the locations for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine in the external output means. This makes it easier to perform wiring work for external output.

Feature A70. the first predetermined output means uses one terminal of the external output means when outputting the first predetermined information,
The gaming machine according to feature A69, wherein the second predetermined output means utilizes a plurality of terminals of the external output means when outputting the predetermined information.

According to feature A70, since the number of terminals for the specific control means to output the first predetermined information to the outside is one, the number of terminals is suppressed while simplifying the communication configuration for performing the external output. becomes possible. On the other hand, since the number of terminals for outputting the second predetermined information by the effect content determining means is plural, it is possible to output the information as a command. This makes it possible to flexibly deal with the diversification of the types of predetermined information to be output to the outside.

Feature A71. external output means (external terminal plate 79) for outputting information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine;
State information output means for outputting information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine (steps S602, S803, S809, S1010, etc. in the main MPU 62) using one terminal provided in the external output means function) and
with
The external output means uses a plurality of terminals provided in the external output means to output information corresponding to the processing result of the effect processing (main side MPU 62 in the first embodiment). In the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound and light side MPU 82, the third embodiment , the function of executing the processing of step S2611 in the sound and light side MPU 82, and the function of executing the processing of step S2704 in the main side MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment). 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to feature A71, the number of terminals for externally outputting the state of the gaming machine is one. It is possible to reduce the number of terminals while simplifying the configuration of communication for performing. On the other hand, since there are a plurality of terminals for externally outputting information corresponding to the content of the effect, it is possible to output the information as a command. This makes it possible to flexibly deal with the diversification of the types of information to be output to the outside.

Feature A72. Equipped with production execution means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54 or pattern display device 41) capable of executing production,
The production processing execution means is
As the effect processing, effect content determination means (in the first and fourth embodiments, a step in the sound and light side MPU 82 A function of executing the processing of steps S1203 to S1206, a function of executing the processing of step S2207 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2602 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment. )When,
As the effect processing, a predetermined effect control means (light emission control processing and sound output in the sound and light side MPU 82) that controls the effect execution means so that the predetermined effect of the effect content determined by the effect content determination means is executed a function of executing control processing, and a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92);
with
The effect content determination means receives control information from other control means (main side MPU 62) and transmits control information to other control means (display side MPU 92) when determining the effect content of the predetermined effect. and at least one of
The gaming machine according to feature A71, wherein the predetermined output means uses the plurality of terminals to output the control information or information corresponding to the control information.

According to feature A72, in a configuration in which control information used when executing a predetermined effect or information corresponding to the control information is externally output, even when there are many types of the control information, information for effect is externally output as a command, it is possible to flexibly deal with many kinds of the control information.

Feature A73. The gaming machine according to feature A72, wherein the predetermined output means uses the plurality of terminals to output the control information.

According to feature A73, since the control information is also used as information for external output, there is no need to prepare information for external output as dedicated information, and it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity.

Feature A74. A communication method when information is output by the predetermined output means is the same as a communication method when the control information is transmitted between the performance content determining means and the other control means. The gaming machine according to feature A72 or A73.

According to feature A74, information can be output to the outside using a processing configuration for transmitting control information. Therefore, simplification of the processing configuration is achieved.

Feature A75. The production processing execution means is
As the effect processing, the effect content determination means for determining the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process (in the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound and light side MPU 82 , the function of executing the processing of step S2207 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of step S2602 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment);
Corresponding information transmission means (in the first embodiment, sound and light The function of executing the processing of step S1208 in the side MPU 82, the function of executing the processing of step S2209 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the processing of step S2604 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment function) and
with
The corresponding effect control means controls the corresponding effect means (symbol display device 41) so that the corresponding effect corresponding to the corresponding information is executed,
The production content determination means has the predetermined output means,
The game machine according to any one of characteristics A71 to A74, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the correspondence information or information corresponding thereto.

According to feature A75, in a configuration in which a corresponding effect is executed by the corresponding effect control means based on the corresponding information transmitted from the effect content determining means, the corresponding information transmitted to the corresponding effect control means or information corresponding thereto is externally output as predetermined information. This makes it possible to execute an effect corresponding to the corresponding effect in the external effect means outside the game machine. Moreover, even when there are many types of correspondence information, the information for effect is output as a command to the outside, so it is possible to flexibly deal with the large number of types of correspondence information.

Feature A76. The gaming machine according to feature A75, wherein the predetermined output means uses the plurality of terminals to output the correspondence information.

According to feature A76, since the correspondence information is also used as information for external output, there is no need to prepare information for external output as dedicated information, and it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity.

Feature A77. A game according to feature A75 or A76, characterized in that a communication method when information is output by said predetermined output means is the same as a communication method when said correspondence information is transmitted by said correspondence information transmission means. machine.

According to feature A77, information can be output to the outside using a processing configuration for transmitting correspondence information. Therefore, simplification of the processing configuration is achieved.

Feature A78. The external output means is another output means (main MPU 62 in the third embodiment) that outputs information corresponding to the processing result of the effect processing using one terminal provided in the external output terminal. A gaming machine according to any one of features A71 to A77, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of steps S2507 and S2508 of .

According to the feature A78, it is possible to diversify the output mode when the information corresponding to the content of the effect is output to the outside.

Feature A79. The gaming machine according to feature A79, wherein the different output means differentiates the type of information to be output by varying the duration of output of information using the one terminal.

According to feature A79, even when information is externally output using one terminal, it is possible to externally output a plurality of types of information according to the content of the presentation.

Feature A80. Production execution means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54 or pattern display device 41) capable of executing production,
Production control means (sound and light side MPU 82 and display side MPU 92) that controls the execution of production in the production execution means,
External output means (in the first embodiment, external output processing at the start of fluctuation in the main side MPU 62 and external output setting at the start of bonus A function of executing processing, a function of executing the processing of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing external output processing at the start of fluctuation in the main side MPU 62 in the third embodiment. and a function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound and light side MPU 82, and a function of executing the process of step S2704 in the main side MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment).

According to the feature A80, since the information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect executing means is output to the outside of the game machine, it is possible to execute mutually related effects beyond the frame of the single game machine. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

For the configuration of features A1 to A80, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C10, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G16, features H1 to H10, features I1 to Any one or more configurations of I8 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. Production execution means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54 or pattern display device 41) capable of executing production,
Production control means (sound and light side MPU 82 or display side MPU 92) that controls the execution of production in the production execution means,
External output means (in the first embodiment, external output processing at the start of fluctuation in the main side MPU 62 and external output setting at the start of bonus A function of executing processing, a function of executing the processing of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing external output processing at the start of fluctuation in the main side MPU 62 in the third embodiment. and the function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound and light side MPU 82, and the function of executing the process of step S2704 in the main side MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment);
with
The effect control means controls the effect execution means (sound and light a function of executing light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the side MPU 82, and a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92),
The external output means is a specific output means for outputting specific information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect after the predetermined effect is started in the effect execution means (in the first embodiment, when the bonus is started in the main MPU 62). function of executing the external output setting process, function of executing the process of step S2216 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment) A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature B1, since the information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect executing means is output to the outside of the game machine, it is possible to execute mutually related effects beyond the framework of the single game machine. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Further, even if the player misses the predetermined effect in the effect executing means, it is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to check the effect corresponding to the predetermined effect again. In addition, in the case where the effects are executed with the time shifted such that the game machine side is the front side and the game machine external side is the rear side, it is possible to relate the contents of these effects.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the specific output means outputs the specific information after the predetermined effect is finished in the effect executing means.

According to feature B2, it is possible to prevent the effect outside the gaming machine based on the external output of the specific information and the predetermined effect in the effect executing means from overlapping in terms of time. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to each effect.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein the specific information includes information that enables specification of the entire content of at least a part of the performance range of the predetermined performance.

According to the feature B3, it is possible to reproduce at least part of the entire performance range of the performance content of the predetermined performance in the external performance means provided outside the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who missed the part of the performance range with an opportunity to check the part of the performance range again.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the specifying information includes information that enables specification of the entire effect content of the predetermined effect.

According to the feature B4, it is possible to reproduce the entire effect content of the predetermined effect in the external effect means provided outside the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who missed the predetermined effect with an opportunity to check the predetermined effect again.

Feature B5. The production control means is a production content determination means (in the first and fourth embodiments, the sound and light side MPU 82 in the A function of executing the processing of steps S1203 to S1206, a function of executing the processing of step S2207 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and executing the processing of step S2602 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment function),
The specific output means is used as the specific information to determine the content of the predetermined effect in the control information or the control information that triggered the decision of the content of the predetermined effect corresponding to the output of the specific information. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein information including information to be played is output.

According to feature B5, in a configuration in which an effect corresponding to a predetermined effect can be executed by an external effect means outside the game machine, control information transmitted by the specific control means is used as the specific information to be output to the outside of the game machine. becomes possible.

Feature B6. Benefit lottery means for executing privilege lottery processing for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player (function for executing special figure fluctuation start processing in main side MPU 62);
Benefit granting means for granting a benefit to the player when the privilege is awarded in the privilege lottery process (function for executing the processing of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
with
The specific control means, as the control information, is information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, the first control information ( command for variation) is transmitted to the effect content determining means, and second control information (type command), which is information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, is transmitted to the effect content determining means separately from that. ,
The specific output means outputs, as the specific information, the first control information or information including information used for determining the content of the predetermined effect in the first control information, while outputting the second control. The game machine according to feature B5, which does not output information.

According to feature B6, by transmitting both the first control information and the second control information from the specific control means, it is possible to carefully confirm the result of the privilege lottery process in the performance content determination means. . In this case, while the first control information or information corresponding thereto is externally output to the outside of the gaming machine as the specific information, the second control information is not externally output. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of information output to the outside while making it possible to execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect outside the gaming machine.

Feature B7. The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, wherein the specific control means has the specific output means.

According to feature B7, since the specific control means existing on the upstream side of the control has a function of outputting predetermined information to the outside of the game machine, it is possible to integrate the function of managing the operation of the game machine into the specific control means. becomes.

Feature B8. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the performance control means has the specific output means.

According to the feature B8, since the specific information is externally output from the effect control means, the specific information is externally output so as to be able to specify the entire effect content of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to reproduce the entire predetermined effect in the external effect means provided outside the game machine.

Feature B9. Benefit lottery means for executing privilege lottery processing for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player (function for executing special figure fluctuation start processing in main side MPU 62);
Special transition means for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous to the player when the privilege is won in the privilege lottery process (the processing of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62 function) and
with
The predetermined effect control means controls the effect execution means so that an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is executed as the predetermined effect,
The effect control means controls the effect execution means so that a special effect corresponding to the special game state is executed after the predetermined effect is executed in the case where the privilege is won in the privilege lottery process. Special effect control means to control (function to execute the processing of steps S1211 to S1220 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the first embodiment, the processing of steps S2210 to S2218 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2605 to S2613 in the sound and light side MPU 82),
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, wherein the specific output means outputs the specific information when the special effect is started.

According to feature B9, when the special game state is being executed in the game machine, the external effect means outside the game machine can execute the effect corresponding to the previous predetermined effect. This makes it possible to improve the interest in the game during the special game state. In addition, when reproducing at least a part of the performance range of the predetermined performance in the external performance means outside the game machine, the predetermined performance to be reproduced was performed before the transition to the special game state. It becomes easier for the player to recognize that it is a predetermined effect.

Feature B10. As the special game state, the first special game state (opening and closing execution mode of high frequency winning mode) whose duration is relatively long, and the second special game state (low frequency winning mode) whose duration is relatively short open/close execution mode) is set,
Characteristic B9, characterized in that the specific output means outputs the specific information in the case of the first special game state and does not output the specific information in the case of the second special game state. game machine.

According to the characteristic B10, since the specific information is externally output when a state having a relatively long duration among the first special game state and the second special game state is started, an effect for reproducing the predetermined effect The effect will be executed only when the period for performing is secured.

Feature B11. The gaming machine according to feature B9 or B10, wherein the specific output means outputs the specific information in the case of the special game state in which the duration is longer than the duration of the predetermined effect. .

According to the feature B11, the external effect means executes the effect only when the period for performing the effect for reproducing the predetermined effect is secured.

For the configuration of features B1 to B11, features A1 to A80, features C1 to C10, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G16, features H1 to H10, features I1 to Any one or more configurations of I8 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. Benefit lottery means for executing privilege lottery processing for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player (function for executing special figure fluctuation start processing in main side MPU 62);
Benefit granting means for granting a benefit to the player when the privilege is awarded in the privilege lottery process (function for executing the processing of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
Production processing execution means for executing production processing for executing production corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery processing (function for executing special figure fluctuation start processing in main side MPU 62, sound and light side MPU 82 and display side MPU 92);
A relationship output means (first In the embodiment, the main side MPU 62 has a function of executing the external output processing at the start of fluctuation and the external output setting processing at the time of the bonus start. , in the third embodiment, the main MPU 62 has a function of executing external output processing at the start of fluctuation and a function of executing the processing of step S2611 in the sound and light side MPU 82; function to perform processing) and
with
The display means for performing a ready-to-win effect for teaching the player the degree of expectation of winning the privilege grant is defective,
A gaming machine characterized in that the ready-to-win effect can be performed in the external effect of the external effect means.

According to the feature C1, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process in the external effect means existing outside the gaming machine. As a result, it becomes possible to execute an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process beyond the framework of the single gaming machine, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

In addition, since the game machine does not have the effect means having the function of executing the ready-to-win effect, the structure of the game machine can be simplified. In this case, since the function of executing the ready-to-win effect is performed by the external effect means, it is possible to provide the ready-to-win effect to the player.

Feature C2. Equipped with production execution means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54 or pattern display device 41) capable of executing production,
The effect processing execution means is a predetermined effect control means ( A function of executing light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the sound and light side MPU 82, and a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92),
Characteristic C1 characterized in that the relational output means outputs the relational effect information in order to enable the external effect corresponding to the predetermined effect to be executed in a situation where the predetermined effect is being executed. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature C2, since the external effect means executes the external effect corresponding to the predetermined effect in a situation where the predetermined effect is being executed, it is possible to perform mutually related effects at the same time, and the effect is executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to both the means and the external presentation means.

Feature C3. A specific control means (main side MPU 62) having the privilege lottery means,
The performance processing executing means is a performance content determining means for determining the performance content of the predetermined performance based on the fact that the specific control means has transmitted control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery processing as the performance processing. (In the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound and light side MPU 82; in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2207 in the sound and light side MPU 82; In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2602 in the sound and light side MPU 82) is provided,
The relational output means outputs, as the relational effect information, the control information or information including information used for determining the effect content of the predetermined effect in the control information. The gaming machine described in C2.

According to the feature C3, in a configuration in which the execution control of the predetermined effect is performed by the predetermined effect control means based on the control of the specific control means, it is possible to execute the external effect using the control information transmitted by the specific control means. becomes.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the specific control means has the relationship output means.

According to feature C4, since the specific control means existing upstream of the control has the function of outputting predetermined information to the outside of the game machine, it is possible to integrate the function of managing the operation of the game machine into the specific control means. becomes. Further, it is possible to externally output the relation effect information by using the processing configuration for transmitting the control information in the specific control means.

Feature C5. A specific control means (main side MPU 62) having the privilege lottery means,
Based on the fact that the specific control means has transmitted control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, the performance processing execution means performs the performance processing in a mode corresponding to the type of the control information, as the performance processing. Effect content determination means for executing the effect content lottery process for determining the effect content of at least a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect (in the first embodiment, the processing of steps S1204 and S1206 in the sound and light side MPU 82 function to execute, a function to execute the processing of step S2207 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function to execute the processing of step S2602 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment),
The relationship output means outputs information corresponding to the result of the effect content lottery process as the relationship effect information,
The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the effect content determining means has the relationship output means.

According to the feature C5, it is possible to externally output information based on the result of the effect content lottery process executed by the effect content determination means as the related effect information, so that the related effect corresponds to the entire predetermined effect. It is possible to perform the production. In addition, since the related performance information is externally output from the performance content determination means, the configuration for outputting the related performance information based on the result of the performance content lottery process can be simplified.

Feature C6. The external effect means is pattern display means for displaying a pattern in a variable manner,
The effect execution means is at least one of sound output means (speaker unit 54) for executing sound output effect and light emitting means (display light emitting unit 53) for executing light emission effect. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the feature C6, it is possible to perform a sound output effect or a light emitting effect related to the pattern display means provided outside the game machine in the game machine, and the effects in the game machine and each effect means outside the game machine can be mutually performed. can be related to

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the external effect means is in a mode corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process after executing the unit effect.

According to the feature C7, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process in the external effect means and to notify the result. As a result, even if the game machine does not have the performance means having these functions, the external performance means can perform the functions.

Feature C8. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, wherein the front face of the gaming machine is capable of arranging the external presentation means in front of the front face of the gaming machine.

According to the feature C8, when the external effect means is used as the effect means of the game machine, it is possible to arrange the external effect means at a position that is easily recognized by the player, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the external effect means. can be increased.

Feature C9. A window portion (window portion 51) is formed in the front portion of the game machine so that a game area formed inside the game machine can be viewed from the front of the game machine,
The gaming machine according to feature C8, wherein the front face of the gaming machine is capable of disposing the external presentation means at a position facing the window in front of the window.

According to the feature C9, it is possible to arrange the external effect means at a position that is easily visible to the player, and to increase the degree of attention to the external effect means.

Feature C10. Benefit lottery means for executing privilege lottery processing for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player (function for executing special figure fluctuation start processing in main side MPU 62);
Benefit granting means for granting a benefit to the player when the privilege is awarded in the privilege lottery process (function for executing the processing of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
Production processing execution means for executing production processing for executing production corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery processing (function for executing special figure fluctuation start processing in main side MPU 62, sound and light side MPU 82 and display side MPU 92);
A relationship output means (first In the embodiment, the main side MPU 62 has a function of executing the external output processing at the start of fluctuation and the external output setting processing at the time of the bonus start. , in the third embodiment, the main MPU 62 has a function of executing external output processing at the start of fluctuation and a function of executing the processing of step S2611 in the sound and light side MPU 82; function to perform processing) and
with
The game machine is characterized in that the front part of the game machine is capable of arranging the external presentation means in front of the front part of the game machine.

According to the feature C10, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process in the external effect means existing outside the gaming machine. As a result, it becomes possible to execute an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process beyond the framework of the single gaming machine, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Also, when the external effect means is used as the effect means of the game machine, it is possible to arrange the external effect means at a position that is easy for the player to recognize, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the external effect means. becomes.

For the configuration of features C1 to C10, features A1 to A80, features B1 to B11, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G16, features H1 to H10, features I1 to Any one or more configurations of I8 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The inventions of the feature group A, feature group B, and feature group C can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for a pachinko machine, a lottery is held based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a changing pattern is displayed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed. A configuration is known in which, when a winning result is obtained, a combination of specific patterns is finally displayed on the display screen, and a transition to a special game state advantageous to the player is made. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. In the case of one of the prescribed state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode) and the state not in the prescribed state, the production content of the first production and the production content of the second production. Corresponding control means (function for executing the processing of step S1707 in the main side MPU 62 in the first embodiment, step S2507 in the main side MPU 62 in the third embodiment function to execute the processing of
The regularity does not occur between the performance content of the first performance and the performance content of the second performance in the non-corresponding state, which is the other of the predetermined state and the state not in the predetermined state. Non-corresponding control means for controlling so as to become a thing (function of executing the processing of step S1708 in the main side MPU 62 in the first embodiment, function of executing the processing of step S2508 in the main side MPU 62 in the third embodiment) When,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature D1, depending on whether or not the predetermined state exists, there may or may not be regularity between the first effect and the second effect. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp or predict whether or not the game machine is in a predetermined state by confirming the correspondence relationship between both effects, and to draw the player's attention to both the first effect and the second effect. becomes possible. Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Feature D2. As game states, there are a first state (high-probability mode) in which rewards are relatively likely to be awarded to the player and a second state (low-probability mode) in which rewards are relatively difficult to be awarded to the player.
The predetermined state is a state that is the first state, and is a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish between the first state and the second state as the notification state of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that it is in a state of being.

According to the feature D2, even in a situation where it is not possible to grasp whether the state of the gaming machine is the first state or not, by confirming the correspondence relationship between the first effect and the second effect, the first effect can be obtained. It is possible to grasp whether the state is the state or not. In this case, the player pays attention to both the first effect and the second effect in order to grasp whether or not the game is in the first state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Feature D3. Judgment means ( a function of executing the process of step S403 in the main side MPU 62);
Benefit giving means for giving a benefit to the player according to the determination result of the determining means (function for executing the processing of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
with
The predetermined state is a state in which the high-probability mode is set, and a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish between the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode as the notification state of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that it is in a state of

According to the feature D3, even in a situation where it is not possible to grasp whether the gaming machine is in the high probability mode or not, it is possible to check the correspondence relationship between the first and second effects. , it becomes possible to grasp whether or not it is in the high-probability mode. In this case, the player pays attention to both the first effect and the second effect in order to know whether the game is in the high-probability mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Feature D4. When a specific event (minor win result) that can occur in the course of the game occurs, a state in which one of the corresponding control means and the non-corresponding control means is controlled is changed to a state in which the other is controlled. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, which is characterized by being changed.

According to feature D4, the change in the correspondence between the effects of the effect execution means and the external effect means is triggered by the occurrence of a specific event, so that the player can easily understand the trigger.

Feature D5. the state of the corresponding side is a state that is not the predetermined state, the state of the non-corresponding side is the predetermined state,
When the game machine is in the predetermined state, the non-corresponding control means, when a specific event (small win result) that can occur in the process of progressing the game occurs, the effect content of the first effect The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein control is performed so that the regularity does not occur between the second effect and the effect content of the second effect.

According to the feature D5, when a specific event occurs while the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, both the first and second effects do not correspond. As a result, the player who has confirmed that the two effects do not correspond can understand that the gaming machine is in the predetermined state, and can increase the degree of attention to the two effects.

Feature D6. Variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) provided in a game area where game balls flow down and switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Variable ball entry control means for controlling opening and closing of the variable ball entry means (function for executing the processing of steps S309 to S311 in the main side MPU 62);
Determination means for determining whether or not to shift the game state (function for executing the processing of step S403 in the main MPU 62);
Transition means for shifting the game state to a state in which the opening/closing control is executed according to the determination result of the determination means (a function of executing special figure determination processing in the main side MPU 62);
with
The judging means judges that it is a specific judgment result (small hit result) that does not change the mode affecting the player's profit before and after the end of the state although the transition to the state where the opening/closing control is executed occurs. Equipped with possible specific determination means,
The gaming machine according to feature D4 or D5, wherein the specific event is the result of the specific determination.

According to the characteristic D6, it is possible to increase the advantage for the player when the specific determination result is obtained. In addition, it is possible to use the specific determination result as a trigger for changing the correspondence relationship between the first execution and the second production, and compared to the configuration that sets a new trigger, the configuration is simpler and the design is simpler. It is possible to achieve simplification.

Feature D7. the state of the corresponding side is a state that is not the predetermined state, the state of the non-corresponding side is the predetermined state,
any one of the features D1 to D6, wherein the second effect is a effect that enables to notify in advance the type of the first effect that will occur after the second effect is started; The game machine described.

According to the feature D7, since the first effect is notified in advance in the second effect, by confirming the second effect, the player can predict or understand the contents of the first effect that will occur thereafter. becomes. In this case, when a specific event occurs while the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, an event occurs in which the details of the advance notification performed as the second effect and the details of the subsequent first effect do not match. . A player who confirms this phenomenon not only recognizes that the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, but also feels unexpectedness in the mismatch between the two effects. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D8. The corresponding control means causes a character identical or corresponding to a character displayed in the first effect to be displayed in the second effect,
Any one of the characteristics D1 to D7, wherein the non-corresponding control means causes a character different from or not corresponding to a character displayed in the first effect to be displayed in the second effect. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature D8, the correspondence between the first effect and the second effect is changed by changing the type of characters to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the correspondence has been changed with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature D9. Benefit lottery means for executing privilege lottery processing for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player (function for executing special figure fluctuation start processing in main side MPU 62);
Benefit granting means for granting a benefit to the player when the privilege is awarded in the privilege lottery process (function for executing the processing of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
A game turn control means (main side MPU 62) that controls the game turn operation means (special figure display unit 37a) so as to execute a game turn operation that corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process after executing the unit production a function to execute the processing of steps S306 to S308 in
with
The first effect and the second effect occur in different execution times of the action for the game cycle, and when controlled by the corresponding control means, the effect contents of the first effect are as follows. is selected as the effect content of the second effect, and when controlled by the non-corresponding control means, the effect content of the first effect is set in the following order. The game machine according to any one of the features D1 to D8, wherein the effect content displayed is not selected as the effect content of the second effect.

According to the feature D9, by confirming the selection order of the contents of the effects between the first effect and the second effect that occur in different execution times of the game cycle motion, it is predicted or confirmed whether or not the predetermined state exists. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the performance over a plurality of execution times of the action for the game time.

Feature D10. Effect execution means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54 and pattern display device 41) capable of executing the first effect,
Production control means (sound and light side MPU 82 and display side MPU 92) that controls the execution of production in the production execution means,
Relationship output means ( In the first embodiment, the main side MPU 62 has a function of executing external output processing at the start of fluctuation and external output setting processing at the time of bonus start. In the third embodiment, the main MPU 62 executes external output processing at the start of fluctuation and the sound and light MPU 82 executes the processing of step S2611. In the fourth embodiment, the main MPU 62 a function to execute the processing of step S2704);
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic D10, since the information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect executing means is output to the outside of the game machine, it is possible to execute mutually related effects beyond the framework of the single game machine. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Also, by comparing the first effect in the effect executing means and the second effect in the external effect means, it is possible to confirm whether or not the two effects correspond to each other. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the effect executing means and the external effect means.

Feature D11. the relationship output means has the corresponding control means and the non-corresponding control means;
The correspondence control means outputs information for associating the second effect in the external effect means with the first effect in the effect execution means as the relation effect information,
Characteristic feature D10, characterized in that the non-corresponding control means outputs, as the relational effect information, information for not matching the second effect in the external effect means with the first effect in the effect execution means. game machine.

According to the feature D11, by adjusting the content of the performance in the external performance means, it is possible to create a situation in which both the performance of the performance execution means and the external performance means correspond and a situation in which they do not correspond. . Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the effects of the effect executing means and the external effect means without affecting the execution mode of the effect in the effect executing means.

Feature D12. The production control means is
Effect content determination means for determining the effect content based on the control information received from the specific control means (main side MPU 62) (In the first and fourth embodiments, the processing of steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound and light side MPU 82 function, the function of executing the processing of step S2207 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2602 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment);
Predetermined effect control means (light emission control in sound and light side MPU 82) that controls the effect execution means so that the first effect (effect for game round) corresponding to the effect content determined by the effect content determination means is executed a function of executing processing and sound output control processing, and a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92);
with
The relationship output means outputs the relationship effect information for enabling the second effect corresponding to the predetermined effect to be executed in a situation where the first effect is being executed,
The gaming machine according to feature D11, wherein the effect content determining means grasps the duration of execution of the predetermined effect based on the control information.

According to feature D12, since the predetermined effect is executed over the execution continuation period corresponding to the control information transmitted from the specific control means, it is difficult to change the content of the effect. On the other hand, when changing the correspondence between the effects of the effect executing means and the external effect means, the effect content of the external effect means is changed. Therefore, when changing the correspondence relationship between both effects, the degree of freedom of the change mode is increased, and it is possible to suitably change the correspondence relationship between both effects.

For the configuration of features D1 to D12, features A1 to A80, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C10, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G16, features H1 to H10, features I1 to Any one or more configurations of I8 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. Judgment means ( a function of executing the process of step S403 in the main side MPU 62);
Benefit giving means for giving a benefit to the player according to the determination result of the determining means (function for executing the processing of steps S308 to S312 in the main side MPU 62);
Transition means for transitioning the determination mode to the high probability mode (function for executing game state transition processing in the main side MPU 62);
terminating means for terminating the high-probability mode after the number of determinations by the determining means in the high-probability mode reaches the termination reference number (function for executing mode transition processing in the main MPU 62);
with
A gaming machine characterized in that there are a plurality of types of the end reference number of times.

According to feature E1, the player not only expects to enter the high-probability mode, but also expects to enter the high-probability mode with a greater number of ending reference times. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player, and to improve the interest in the game.

Feature E2. a specific ball entry portion (second operating port 34) configured to allow a game ball to enter and to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Acceptance control means for controlling the state of the specific ball entrance section (function for executing normal/universal/universal electric power control processing in the main side MPU 62);
with
The determination means performs the determination based on when a game ball enters the specific ball entry portion,
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball entrance portion between the open state and the closed state, does not enter the open state or has a relatively low chance of entering the open state per unit time. It has at least a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the opportunity to be in the open state per unit time is relatively high,
The game state includes a first game state which is the high-probability mode and the high-frequency switching mode and ends after the number of determinations by the determination means reaches the corresponding end reference number of times,
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein a plurality of types of game states with different end reference times are set as the first game state.

According to the feature E2, the player not only expects to enter the first game state, but also expects to enter the first game state with a larger number of end reference times. Therefore, it is possible to suitably raise the level of expectation of the player, and to improve the interest in the game.

Feature E3. a specific ball entry portion (second actuation opening 34) which allows a game ball to enter and is switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Acceptance control means for controlling the state of the specific ball entry section (function for executing normal/universal electric power control processing in main side MPU 62);
with
The determination means performs the determination based on when a game ball enters the specific ball entry portion,
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball entrance portion between the open state and the closed state, does not enter the open state or has a relatively low chance of entering the open state per unit time. It has at least a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the opportunity to be in the open state per unit time is relatively high,
As the game state, a first game state which is the high probability mode and the high frequency switching mode and ends after the number of determinations by the determination means reaches the corresponding end reference number of times, and the high probability mode and a second game state which is the low frequency switching mode and ends after the number of determinations by the determination means reaches the corresponding end reference number of times,
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the first game state includes a game state in which the standard end count is smaller than the standard end count in the second game state.

According to the feature E3, even in the second game state, the end reference number of times may be greater than in the first game state. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of the second game state, and to increase the expectation for the occurrence of the second game state.

Feature E4. The determination means generates a transition to the second game state if it occurs in the low frequency switching mode, and a predetermined judgment result ( Equipped with a predetermined determination means that can be determined to be a non-explicit high probability jackpot result),
The first game state, which is shifted when the predetermined determination result is obtained in the high-frequency switching mode, is higher than the first game state, which is shifted based on another specific determination result. The gaming machine according to feature E3, characterized by having a large number of times.

According to the feature E4, it is possible to increase the advantage of obtaining the predetermined determination result in the high-frequency switching mode, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the occurrence of the predetermined determination result.

Feature E5. A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) provided so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state, respectively;
Variable ball entry control means for controlling opening and closing of the variable ball entry means (function for executing the processing of steps S309 to S311 in the main side MPU 62);
with
The privilege granting means shifts the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the opening/closing control is executed according to the judgment result of the judgment means,
The special game state includes a special game state with a high ball-entering frequency and a special game state with a low ball-entering frequency in which the frequency of ball-entering the variable ball-entering means is relatively high and low,
The high-probability mode that occurs after the special game state with the low ball-entering frequency is entered has a greater end reference number of times than the high-probability mode that occurs after the special game state with the high ball-entering frequency is entered. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized by comprising means for making the number of times.

According to feature E5, even in a special game state with a low ball-entering frequency, the standard number of endings in the high-probability mode may be greater than in a special game state with a high ball-entering frequency. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of the occurrence of the special game state of the low-frequency ball-entering, and to increase the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the special game state of the low-frequency-entering ball.

Feature E6. Any one of the features E1 to E5, characterized by comprising an expectation degree notification means (a function of executing the ending corresponding processing in the sound and light side MPU 82) for notifying the degree of expectation that the end reference number of times is a large number. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature E6, it is possible to favorably increase the sense of expectation for the fact that a large number of ending reference times has been selected.

Feature E7. Number-of-times output means (a function of executing the process of step S2003 in the main MPU 62) for outputting the number-of-times correspondence information (number-of-times command) that is the information of the end reference number of times or the information corresponding thereto (number-of-times correspondence command) to the outside of the game machine The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized in that

According to feature E7, it is possible to manage the end reference number of times in a device provided outside the gaming machine. In addition, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the end reference number of times by an external effect means provided outside the game machine.

Feature E8. The number-of-times corresponding output means is characterized in that it outputs indirect information corresponding to the end-standard number of times as the number-of-times corresponding information, instead of outputting information explicitly indicating the standard number of times of termination. The gaming machine described in E7.

According to the feature E8, when the performance corresponding to the end reference number of times is executed by the external effect means outside the game machine, it is possible to prevent the end reference number of times from being specified by the external effect means. Become. As a result, even if a communication error occurs with respect to the output of the number-of-times correspondence information, for example, it is possible to prevent the abnormal end reference number of times from being clearly indicated, making it difficult to confuse the player.

Feature E9. Predetermined effect control means for controlling the effect execution means (in the first and fourth embodiments, the sound and light side MPU 82 The function of executing the processing of steps S1203 to S1207, the function of executing the processing of step S2207 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the processing of step S2602 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment function),
Characteristic feature E7 or E8, wherein the frequency-corresponding output means outputs the frequency-corresponding information after the performance content of the predetermined performance becomes the performance content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature E9, before the performance content of the predetermined performance becomes the performance content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, the external performance means outside the game machine expresses the end standard number of times or responds to the end standard number of times. To prevent performance from being executed. As a result, it is possible to execute the performance corresponding to the end reference number of times by the external performance means while not impairing the function of executing the predetermined performance.

Feature E10. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
An operating ball entry portion (first operating port 33) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
It is determined whether or not to grant a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the operating ball entrance portion, and as the determination mode, the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the award of the privilege is relatively high or low. Determination means having at least a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode of
Benefit giving means for giving a benefit to the player according to the determination result of the determining means (function for executing the processing of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
Transition means for transitioning the determination mode to the high probability mode (function for executing game state transition processing in the main MPU 62);
with
A gaming machine characterized in that there are a plurality of conditions for ending the high-probability mode.

According to the feature E10, the player not only expects to enter the high-probability mode, but also expects that the high-probability mode will continue for a longer period of time. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately raise the expectation of the player, and to improve the interest in the game.

For the configuration of features E1 to E10, features A1 to A80, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C10, features D1 to D12, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G16, features H1 to H10, features I1 to Any one or more configurations of I8 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The inventions of the characteristic group D and the characteristic group E can solve the following problems.

For example, a game machine such as a pachinko game machine performs a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and when the lottery result is a predetermined result, a game state transition such as a transition to a winning state occurs. do. Also, there is known a game machine that has a plurality of modes such as a high probability mode and a low probability mode as the lottery mode so that the probability of obtaining a predetermined winning result is relatively high or low. In this case, the player plays the game while expecting a mode with a high probability of a winning result.

Specifically, for a pachinko machine, for example, a winning lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and when a winning result is obtained in the winning lottery, the display device is displayed. A configuration is known in which a specific pattern combination or the like is displayed in a final stop on the display surface, and a transition is made to a special game state advantageous to the player. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device. Further, for example, after the end of the special game state, there is known a configuration in which one of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode is set as the win/fail lottery mode. In the high-probability mode, for example, an effect different from that in the low-probability mode is executed on the display surface, or an operation different from that in the low-probability mode is executed by a movable member provided in the game area, for example. Thus, the player plays the game while recognizing that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. Production execution means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54 or pattern display device 41) capable of executing production,
Specific control means (main side MPU 62) decides the content of the effect based on the control information transmitted In the form, the function of executing the processing of step S2602 in the sound and light side MPU 82);
Predetermined effect control means (light emission control in sound and light side MPU 82) that controls the effect execution means so that a predetermined effect (effect for game round) is executed in a manner corresponding to the effect content determined by the effect content determination means a function of executing processing and sound output control processing, and a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92);
Predetermined output means for outputting predetermined information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect in the effect execution means to the outside of the game machine (in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound and light side MPU 82 , in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2611 in the sound and light side MPU 82);
with
A gaming machine characterized in that said effect content determination means has said predetermined output means.

According to the feature F1, the information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect in the effect executing means is output to the outside of the gaming machine, so that mutually related effects can be executed beyond the framework of the single gaming machine. . Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Further, since the predetermined information is externally output from the effect content determination means, the predetermined information can be externally output so as to be able to specify the entire effect content of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means. Become. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect or the like related to the entire effect content of the predetermined effect outside the game machine.

Feature F2. The specific control means is
Benefit lottery means for executing privilege lottery processing for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player (function for executing special figure fluctuation start processing in main side MPU 62);
Benefit granting means for granting a benefit to the player when the privilege is awarded in the privilege lottery process (function for executing the processing of steps S308 to S312 in the main side MPU 62);
The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized by comprising:

Since it has the configuration of the feature F1 and the effect content determination means outputs predetermined information to the outside, the effect can be achieved while reducing the processing load of the specific control means that executes the privilege lottery process, the process for granting benefits, etc. It is possible to execute an effect related to the effect in the execution means outside the game machine.

Feature F3. The predetermined output means is used as the predetermined information to determine the effect content of the predetermined effect in the control information or the control information that triggered the determination of the effect content of the predetermined effect corresponding to the output of the predetermined information. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein information including information to be played is output.

According to the feature F3, in a configuration in which an effect corresponding to a predetermined effect can be executed by an external effect means outside the game machine, control information transmitted by the specific control means is used as the predetermined information to be output to the outside of the game machine. becomes possible.

Feature F4. Benefit lottery means for executing privilege lottery processing for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player (function for executing special figure fluctuation start processing in main side MPU 62);
Benefit granting means for granting a benefit to the player when the privilege is awarded in the privilege lottery process (function for executing the processing of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
with
The specific control means, as the control information, is information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, the first control information ( command for variation) is transmitted to the effect content determining means, and second control information (type command), which is information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, is transmitted to the effect content determining means separately from that. ,
The predetermined output means outputs, as the predetermined information, the first control information or information including information used for determining the effect content of the predetermined effect in the first control information, while outputting the second control. The gaming machine according to feature F3, which does not output information.

According to the feature F4, both the first control information and the second control information are transmitted from the specific control means, so that the result of the privilege lottery process can be carefully confirmed by the performance content determination means. . In this case, the first control information or information corresponding thereto is externally output as predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, while the second control information is not externally output. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of information output to the outside while making it possible to execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect outside the gaming machine.

Feature F5. The effect content determination means is effect lottery means for executing a effect content lottery process for determining the effect contents of at least a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect (in the second embodiment, the step in the sound and light side MPU 82 A function of executing the processing of S2207, a function of executing the processing of step S2602 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment),
The effect lottery means executes the effect content lottery process in a mode corresponding to the type of the control information,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the predetermined output means outputs, as the predetermined information, information corresponding to the result of the effect content lottery process.

According to the feature F5, it is possible to externally output information based on the result of the effect content lottery process, so it is possible to grasp the entire effect content of the predetermined effect in a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature F6. The effect content determining means is a corresponding information transmitting means for transmitting corresponding information (a stop result command and a pattern command) to a corresponding effect control means (display side MPU 92) when receiving the control information and executing the predetermined effect. (In the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2209 in the sound and light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2604 in the sound and light side MPU 82),
The corresponding effect control means controls the corresponding effect means (symbol display device 41) so that the corresponding effect corresponding to the corresponding information is executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the correspondence information as the predetermined information.

According to the feature F6, in the configuration in which the corresponding effect control means executes the corresponding effect based on the corresponding information transmitted from the effect content determining means, the corresponding effect information transmitted to the corresponding effect control means is externally transmitted as the predetermined information. output. This eliminates the need to prepare the predetermined information as dedicated information, making it possible to reduce the required storage capacity. In addition, the processing configuration for outputting correspondence information can be used for externally outputting predetermined information, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature F7. A communication method (serial communication) in which the predetermined information is output by the predetermined output means is the same as a communication method (serial communication) in which the correspondence information is transmitted by the correspondence information transmission means. The gaming machine according to feature F6.

According to the feature F7, it is possible to externally output the predetermined information by using the processing configuration for transmitting the corresponding information to the corresponding effect control means. Therefore, simplification of the processing configuration is achieved.

Feature F8. Any one of the characteristics F1 to F7, wherein the predetermined output means outputs midway information (exit command) corresponding to the content of the performance during execution of the predetermined performance during execution of the predetermined performance. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature F8, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect by the external effect means provided outside the game machine during execution of the predetermined effect. In addition, since the configuration of the feature F1 is provided and the effect content determination means is configured to output externally, it becomes easy to specify the timing of external output during execution of the predetermined effect, and the configuration for performing the external output is simplified. is planned.

Feature F9. The specific control means includes specific side output means for outputting information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine (function for executing steps S602, S803, S809, S1010, etc. in the main MPU 62). The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F8, characterized in that

According to feature F9, in a configuration in which information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine is externally output by the specific control means, the external output of information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect executing means is performed by the effect content determining means. By doing so, it becomes possible to distribute the subject of the external output according to the function of each control means. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform external output suitably.

Feature F10. The gaming machine according to feature F9, wherein a communication method when the predetermined information is output by the predetermined output means is different from a communication method when the information is output by the output means on the specific side. .

According to the feature F10, the communication method differs depending on the type of information to be output to the outside, so that the information can be output to the outside according to the nature of the information, and the output to the outside can be preferably performed. .

Feature F11. The output means on the specific side outputs information through external output means (external terminal plate 79),
The game machine according to feature F9 or F10, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the predetermined information through the external output terminal board.

According to the feature F11, it is possible to integrate the parts for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine into the external output means. This makes it easier to perform wiring work for external output.

Feature F12. the output means on the specific side uses one terminal of the external output means when outputting one piece of information;
The gaming machine according to feature F11, wherein the predetermined output means utilizes a plurality of terminals of the external output means when outputting the predetermined information.

According to feature F12, the number of terminals for the specific control means to externally output the state of the gaming machine is one. , it is possible to reduce the number of terminals while simplifying the communication configuration for performing the external output. On the other hand, since the number of terminals for the predetermined effect control means to externally output the information corresponding to the contents of the effect is plural, it is possible to output the information as a command. This makes it possible to flexibly deal with the diversification of the types of information to be output to the outside.

For the configuration of features F1 to F12, features A1 to A80, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C10, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E10, features G1 to G16, features H1 to H10, features I1 to Any one or more configurations of I8 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. Production execution means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54 or pattern display device 41) capable of executing production,
Predetermined effect control means (light emission control processing in sound and light side MPU 82) that controls the effect execution means so that a predetermined effect (effect for game round) corresponding to the start opportunity is executed when a predetermined start opportunity is reached and a function of executing sound output control processing, and a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92);
First predetermined output means for outputting first predetermined information including information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect to the outside of the game machine when the first timing comes in relation to the predetermined effect (first embodiment) Then, the external output process at the start of fluctuation in the main MPU 62, the function of executing the process of step S2206 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the external output process at the start of fluctuation in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment function) and
Second predetermined output means for outputting second predetermined information including information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect to the outside of the game machine when the second timing comes in relation to the predetermined effect (first embodiment) Then, the function of executing the external output setting process at the start of the bonus in the main side MPU 62, the function of executing the process of step S2216 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the step in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment a function to execute the processing of S2611);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature G1, the information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect is externally output as the first predetermined information and the second predetermined information at different timings. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to each timing by the external effect means provided outside the game machine, and it is possible to diversify the contents of the effect to be executed by the external effect means. .

Feature G2. Benefit lottery means for executing privilege lottery processing for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player (function for executing special figure fluctuation start processing in main side MPU 62);
Benefit granting means for granting a benefit to the player when the privilege is awarded in the privilege lottery process (function for executing the processing of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
with
The predetermined effect control means controls the effect execution means so that the predetermined effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is executed,
The first predetermined output means outputs information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect at the first timing before the effect content of the predetermined effect becomes the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process. which outputs the first predetermined information including
The second predetermined output means includes information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect at the second timing after the timing when the content of the predetermined effect becomes the content of the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the gaming machine outputs the second predetermined information.

According to the feature G2, there is an opportunity to externally output the effect content of the effect executing means at the timing before and after the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process. As a result, it is possible to perform the performance in the external performance means in different modes according to whether or not the performance content corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery processing, thereby diversifying the performance in the external performance means. becomes possible.

Feature G3. The gaming machine according to feature G2, characterized in that the second predetermined information has a larger amount of information of the effect content of the predetermined effect that can be derived from the predetermined information than the first predetermined information.

In a situation where the performance contents of the predetermined performance executed by the performance executing means are not the performance contents corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, the function of executing the predetermined performance is not spoiled. It is not preferable for the external effect means to provide more information than necessary regarding the effect content of the predetermined effect. On the other hand, after the performance content of the predetermined performance has become the performance content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, even if a lot of information about the performance content of the predetermined performance is provided by the external performance means, the predetermined performance is not performed. This is preferable because it does not impair the function of execution, and on the contrary, it enables various effects to be performed by the external effect means. In such a situation, the second predetermined information has a greater amount of information on the effect content of the predetermined effect that can be derived from the predetermined information than the first predetermined information, so that an appropriate external effect can be obtained at each timing. It becomes possible to output.

Feature G4. The first predetermined output means uses, as the first predetermined information, information corresponding to a part of the performance range included in the predetermined performance, rather than the information that enables the entire content of the predetermined performance to be specified. which outputs
The second predetermined output means outputs, as the second predetermined information, information enabling the entire content of the predetermined performance to be specified, or information corresponding to a greater range of performance than in the case of the first predetermined information. The game machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, characterized in that

According to the feature G4, since the first predetermined information is output to the outside, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect by the external effect means outside the game machine. becomes. In this case, it is possible to prevent the result of the privilege lottery process from being clearly indicated by the effect outside the game machine, and it is possible to prevent the function of executing the predetermined effect from being impaired. On the other hand, since the second predetermined information is output, the predetermined performance executed by the performance executing means can be reproduced by the external performance means, and the predetermined performance is presented to the player who missed the predetermined performance. It is possible to give an opportunity to check again.

Feature G5. The first predetermined output means outputs the first predetermined information common to the plurality of types of predetermined effects,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein the second predetermined output means outputs the second predetermined information individually for a plurality of types of predetermined effects.

According to the characteristic G5, when the first predetermined information is output to the outside, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to a common effect content for a plurality of types of predetermined effects by the external effect means. When the information is output to the outside, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to each predetermined effect by the external effect means.

Feature G6. The predetermined effect control means can select a plurality of types of effect contents for a predetermined effect determining element as the effect content of the predetermined effect, while the predetermined effect derived from the predetermined effect determining element has a common effect. The content of the production is selected so that the content of the production is included,
The first predetermined information includes information specifying the common effect content, but does not include information specifying non-common effect content,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein the second predetermined information includes at least information specifying the non-common performance content.

According to the feature G6, since the first predetermined information is output to the outside, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the common effect contents in the predetermined effect by the external effect means outside the game machine. In this case, it is possible to prevent the result of the privilege lottery process from being clearly indicated by the effect outside the game machine, and it is possible to prevent the function of executing the predetermined effect from being impaired. On the other hand, since the second predetermined information is output, the predetermined performance executed by the performance executing means can be reproduced by the external performance means, and the predetermined performance is presented to the player who missed the predetermined performance. It is possible to give an opportunity to check again.

Feature G7. Benefit lottery means for executing privilege lottery processing for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player (function for executing special figure fluctuation start processing in main side MPU 62);
Benefit granting means for granting a benefit to the player when the privilege is awarded in the privilege lottery process (function for executing the processing of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
with
The predetermined effect control means controls the effect execution means so that the predetermined effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is executed,
The first predetermined output means uses, as the first predetermined information, information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect, and the predetermined output means is information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect in the privilege lottery process whether or not the privilege is awarded. It outputs information corresponding to the content of the production that can be executed as a production,
The second predetermined output means, as the second predetermined information, is information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect, and corresponds to the content of the effect that differs depending on whether or not the privilege is awarded in the privilege lottery process. The game machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, wherein the game machine outputs information to be played.

According to the feature G7, since the first predetermined information is output, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect and not indicating the result of the privilege lottery process by the external effect means outside the game machine. . In this case, it is possible to prevent the result of the privilege lottery process from being clearly indicated by the effect outside the game machine, and it is possible to prevent the function of executing the predetermined effect from being impaired. On the other hand, since the second predetermined information is output, an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect and indicating the result of the privilege lottery process can be executed by the external effect means outside the game machine. In this case, the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means can be reproduced by the external effect means, and the player who missed the predetermined effect can be given an opportunity to reconfirm the predetermined effect. Become.

Feature G8. Benefit lottery means for executing privilege lottery processing for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player (function for executing special figure fluctuation start processing in main side MPU 62);
Benefit granting means for granting a benefit to the player when the privilege is awarded in the privilege lottery process (function for executing the processing of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
with
The predetermined effect control means controls the effect execution means so that the predetermined effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is executed,
The first predetermined information does not include information specifying the result of the privilege lottery process, and the second predetermined information includes information specifying the result of the privilege lottery process. The game machine according to any one of G1 to G7.

According to the feature G8, the external effect means outside the gaming machine performs effects in a mode in which the result of the privilege lottery process is not specified, and in a mode in which the result of the privilege lottery process is specified. It is possible to generate Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effects executed by the external effect means.

Feature G9. Benefit lottery means for executing privilege lottery processing for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player (function for executing special figure fluctuation start processing in main side MPU 62);
Benefit granting means for granting a benefit to the player when the privilege is awarded in the privilege lottery process (function for executing the processing of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
with
The predetermined effect control means controls the effect execution means so that the predetermined effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is executed,
There are a plurality of types of privileges granted by the privilege granting means,
The first predetermined output means outputs the first predetermined information without including information specifying the type of privilege,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G8, wherein the second predetermined output means outputs the second predetermined information including information specifying the type of the privilege.

According to feature G9, the external effect means outside the gaming machine can produce effects in which the type of privilege is not specified and in which the type of privilege is specified. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effects executed by the external effect means.

Feature G10. The predetermined effect control means causes the effect execution means to execute the predetermined effect over a predetermined duration,
The first predetermined output means outputs the first predetermined information without including information specifying the predetermined duration,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G9, wherein the second predetermined output means outputs the second predetermined information including information specifying the predetermined duration.

According to the feature G10, the external effect means outside the gaming machine performs the effect in a manner not based on the predetermined duration of the predetermined effect, and the case in which the effect is performed in a manner based on the predetermined duration of the predetermined effect. Each can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effects executed by the external effect means.

Feature G11. Specific control means (main side MPU 62) based on the transmission of the control information effect content determination means (in the first and fourth embodiments, step S1203 in the sound and light side MPU 82 to step A function of executing the processing of S1206, a function of executing the processing of step S2207 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2602 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment). ,
The game machine according to any one of features G1 to G10, wherein the effect content determining means has the second predetermined output means.

According to the feature G11, since the effect content determining means can easily grasp the details of the effect contents of the predetermined effect than the specific control means, the effect content determining means has the second predetermined output means, whereby the first predetermined information and the first predetermined information are obtained. 2) It becomes easy to make the amount of information about the effect content of the predetermined effect different from that of the predetermined information.

Feature G12. The effect content determining means is a corresponding information transmitting means for transmitting corresponding information (a stop result command and a pattern command) to a corresponding effect control means (display side MPU 92) when receiving the control information and executing the predetermined effect. (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1208 in the sound and light side MPU 82; in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2209 in the sound and light side MPU 82; in the third embodiment, the sound and light side A function to execute the processing of step S2604 in the MPU 82),
The corresponding effect control means controls the corresponding effect means so that a corresponding effect corresponding to the corresponding information is executed,
The gaming machine according to feature G11, wherein the second predetermined output means outputs the correspondence information as the second predetermined information.

According to feature G12, in the configuration in which the corresponding effect control means executes the corresponding effect based on the corresponding information transmitted from the effect content determining means, the corresponding effect information transmitted to the corresponding effect control means is the second predetermined information. is externally output as This eliminates the need to prepare the second predetermined information as dedicated information, making it possible to reduce the required storage capacity. Also, the processing configuration for outputting the correspondence information can be used for externally outputting the second predetermined information, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature G13. Characteristic G12, characterized in that a communication method when the second predetermined information is output by the second predetermined output means is the same as a communication method when the correspondence information is transmitted by the correspondence information transmission means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature G13, it is possible to output the second predetermined information to the outside by using the processing configuration for transmitting the corresponding information to the corresponding effect control means, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature G14. The game machine according to any one of features G11 to G13, wherein the specific control means has the first predetermined output means.

According to feature G14, since the specific control means externally outputs the first predetermined information and the performance content determination means externally outputs the second predetermined information, the subject of the external output is distributed according to the function of each control means. becomes possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform external output suitably.

Feature G15. The gaming machine according to feature G14, wherein the first predetermined output means and the second predetermined output means output information through the same external output means (external terminal plate 79).

According to the feature G15, it is possible to concentrate the parts for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine in the external output means. This makes it easier to perform wiring work for external output.

Feature G16. The first predetermined output means uses one terminal of the external output means when outputting the first predetermined information,
The gaming machine according to feature G15, wherein the second predetermined output means utilizes a plurality of terminals of the external output means when outputting the predetermined information.

According to feature G16, the number of terminals for the specific control means to output the first predetermined information to the outside is one, so the number of terminals is suppressed while simplifying the communication configuration for performing the external output. becomes possible. On the other hand, since the number of terminals for outputting the second predetermined information by the effect content determining means is plural, it is possible to output the information as a command. This makes it possible to flexibly deal with the diversification of the types of predetermined information to be output to the outside.

For the configuration of features G1 to G16, features A1 to A80, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C10, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F12, features H1 to H10, features I1 to Any one or more configurations of I8 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The inventions of the group of features F and group of features G can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for a pachinko machine, a lottery is held based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and a changing pattern is displayed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed. A configuration is known in which, when a winning result is obtained, a combination of specific patterns is finally displayed on the display screen, and a transition to a special game state advantageous to the player is made. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. external output means (external terminal plate 79) for outputting information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine;
Using one terminal provided in the external output means, the first output means (step S602, step S803, step S809 and step S1010 etc. in the main side MPU 62 are executed function) and
A second output means for outputting information to the outside of the game machine using a plurality of terminals provided in the external output means (in the first embodiment, external output processing and bonus A function of executing external output setting processing at the time of start, a function of executing the processing of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the processing of step S2611 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2704 in the main MPU 62);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H1, when information is output to the outside of the game machine, the information is output using one terminal provided in the external output means, and when the information is output to the external output means In some cases, the data is output to the outside using a plurality of provided terminals. According to the former external output, it is possible to reduce the number of terminals while simplifying the communication configuration for performing the external output. On the other hand, according to the latter external output, information can be output as a command. As a result, it is possible to flexibly cope with the diversification of the types of information to be output to the outside, and it is possible to perform the output to the outside in a suitable manner.

Feature H2. The first output means uses one terminal provided in the external output means to output information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine,
Characteristic feature H1, characterized in that the second output means outputs information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect executing means by using a plurality of terminals provided in the external output means. game machine.

According to feature H2, the number of terminals for externally outputting the state of the gaming machine is one. It is possible to reduce the number of terminals while simplifying the configuration of communication for performing. On the other hand, since the number of terminals for externally outputting the information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect control means is plural, it is possible to output the information as a command. This makes it possible to flexibly deal with the diversification of the types of information to be output to the outside.

Feature H3. Equipped with production control means (sound and light side MPU 82) that controls the execution of production in production execution means,
The effect control means receives control information from other control means (main side MPU 62) and transmits control information to other control means (display side MPU 92) when executing a predetermined effect (effect for game round) is to send the
The gaming machine according to feature H2, wherein the second output means uses the plurality of terminals to output the control information or information corresponding to the control information.

According to feature H3, in a configuration in which control information used for executing a predetermined effect or information corresponding to the control information is externally output, even if there are many types of the control information, information for effect is externally output as a command, it is possible to flexibly deal with many kinds of the control information.

Feature H4. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the second output means uses the plurality of terminals to output the control information.

According to feature H4, since the control information is also used as information for external output, there is no need to prepare information for external output as dedicated information, and it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity.

Feature H5. The communication method when the information is output by the second output means is the same as the communication method when the control information is transmitted between the effect control means and the other control means. The gaming machine according to feature H3 or H4.

According to feature H5, information can be output to the outside using a processing configuration for transmitting control information. Therefore, simplification of the processing configuration is achieved.

Feature H6. The production control means is
Predetermined effect control means (first and fourth embodiments) for controlling the effect executing means so that a predetermined effect (effect for game round) corresponding to the start opportunity is executed when a predetermined start opportunity is reached Then, the function of executing the processing of steps S1203 to S1207 in the sound and light side MPU 82, the function of executing the processing of step S2207 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the step in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment a function to execute the processing of S2602);
When executing the predetermined effect, corresponding information transmitting means (in the first embodiment, step S1208 in sound and light side MPU 82) for transmitting corresponding information (stop result command and pattern command) to corresponding effect control means (display side MPU 92) , a function of executing the processing of step S2209 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2604 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment);
with
The corresponding effect control means controls the corresponding effect means (symbol display device 41) so that the corresponding effect corresponding to the corresponding information is executed,
The production control means has the second output means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H5, wherein the second output means outputs the corresponding information or information corresponding thereto.

According to the feature H6, in the configuration in which the corresponding effect control means executes the corresponding effect based on the corresponding information transmitted from the effect control means, the corresponding information transmitted to the corresponding effect control means or the information corresponding thereto is It is externally output as predetermined information. This makes it possible to execute an effect corresponding to the corresponding effect in the external effect means outside the game machine. Moreover, even when there are many types of correspondence information, the information for effect is output as a command to the outside, so it is possible to flexibly deal with the large number of types of correspondence information.

Feature H7. The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein the second output means uses the plurality of terminals to output the correspondence information.

According to feature H7, since the correspondence information is also used as information for external output, there is no need to prepare information for external output as dedicated information, and it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity.

Feature H8. Characteristic feature H6 or H7, characterized in that the communication method used when the information is output by the second output means is the same as the communication method used when the correspondence information is transmitted by the correspondence information transmission means. game machine.

According to the feature H8, it is possible to output the information to the outside using the processing configuration for transmitting the correspondence information. Therefore, simplification of the processing configuration is achieved.

Feature H9. The first output means uses one terminal provided in the external output terminal to output information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect execution means (main in the third embodiment). A gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H8, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of steps S2507 and S2508 of the side MPU 62 .

According to the characteristic H9, it is possible to diversify the output mode when the information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect executing means is externally output.

Feature H10. The gaming machine according to feature H9, wherein the different output means differentiates the type of information to be output by varying the duration of output of information using the one terminal.

According to the feature H10, even when information is externally output using one terminal, it is possible to externally output a plurality of types of information according to the content of the presentation.

For the configuration of features H1 to H10, features A1 to A80, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C10, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G16, features I1 to Any one or more configurations of I8 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. a first control means (sound and light side MPU 82);
a second control means (display side MPU 92) for executing a predetermined process based on the control information transmitted by the first control means;
External output means (external terminal board 79) for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine;
Output execution means for outputting the control information transmitted from the first control means or information corresponding thereto to the outside of the game machine through the external output means (step in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment a function of executing the processing of S2206 and step S2216, a function of executing the processing of step S2611 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment;
with
A communication method when information is output by the output execution means is the same as a communication method when the control information is transmitted between the first control means and the second control means. game machine.

According to feature I1, information can be output to the outside using a processing configuration for transmitting control information between the first control means and the second control means. Therefore, it is possible to output information externally while simplifying the processing configuration, and it is possible to suitably perform external output.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the first control means has the output execution means.

According to feature I2, information can be output to the outside using the processing configuration for transmitting control information in the first control means as it is. This makes it possible to output information to the outside while simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature I3. The first control means executes specific processing based on predetermined control information transmitted by the third control means (main MPU 62), and transmits information corresponding to the result of the specific processing as the control information. The gaming machine according to feature I2, characterized by:

According to feature I3, information corresponding to the result of specific processing in the first control means is output to the outside of the gaming machine while eliminating the need for communication between the third control means and the first control means when outputting to the outside. becomes possible.

Feature I4. The third control means outputs information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine (the function of executing steps S602, S803, S809 and S1010 in the main MPU 62) on the specific side. The gaming machine according to feature I3, characterized by comprising:

According to feature I4, in a configuration in which information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine is externally output by the third control means, information corresponding to the result of specific processing is externally output by the first control means. By doing so, it becomes possible to distribute the subject of the external output according to the function of each control means. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform external output suitably.

Feature I5. The third control means transmits the predetermined control information by a predetermined communication method,
The communication method when the control information is transmitted between the first control means and the second control means and the communication method when the information is output by the output execution means are different from the predetermined communication method. The gaming machine according to feature I3 or I4, which is different.

According to feature I5, when the communication method is diversified, it is possible to output information to the outside while simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature I6. The first control means controls the execution of effects in the effect execution means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54), and when executing a predetermined effect (effect for game round), the control information is The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, characterized in that it transmits.

According to feature I6, since information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect in the effect execution means is output to the outside of the game machine, it is possible to execute mutually related effects beyond the framework of the single game machine. . Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature I1, it is possible to output information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect to the outside while simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature I7. The first control means transmits the control information using a plurality of signal lines,
The output execution means according to any one of features I1 to I6, wherein the output execution means outputs information to the outside of the gaming machine using a plurality of terminals provided in the external output means. game machine.

According to feature I7, in a configuration that enables diversification of the types of control information, it is possible to make the types of information that are externally output correspond to them.

As a more specific configuration of feature I7, "the first control means transmits the control information by one of serial communication and parallel communication, and the output execution means Information is output to the outside of the game machine by one of the communication methods."

Feature I8. a first control means (sound and light side MPU 82);
a second control means (display side MPU 92) for executing a predetermined process based on the control information transmitted by the first control means;
External output means (external terminal board 79) for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine;
Output execution means for outputting the control information transmitted from the first control means to the outside of the gaming machine through the external output means (in the second embodiment, step S2206 and step S2216 in the sound and light side MPU 82 a function of executing processing (a function of executing the processing of step S2611 in the sound and light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature I8, the control information transmitted from the first control means is output to the outside as it is. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare the information for external output, and the external output can be preferably performed.

For the configuration of features I1 to I8, features A1 to A80, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C10, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G16, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of H10 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The inventions of the characteristic group H and the characteristic group I can solve the following problems.

For example, a game machine such as a pachinko game machine performs a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and when the lottery result is a predetermined result, a game state transition such as a transition to a winning state occurs. do. Also, there is known a game machine that has a plurality of modes such as a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode as the win-or-fail lottery mode so that the probability of obtaining a predetermined winning result is relatively high or low. In this case, the player plays the game while expecting a mode with a high probability of a winning result.

Specifically, for a pachinko machine, for example, a winning lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the game area, and when a winning result is obtained in the winning lottery, the display device is displayed. A configuration is known in which a specific pattern combination or the like is displayed in a final stop on the display surface, and a transition is made to a special game state advantageous to the player. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device. Further, for example, after the special game state is finished, there is known a configuration in which the win/fail lottery mode shifts from one of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode to the other. In the high-probability mode, for example, an effect different from that in the low-probability mode is executed on the display surface, or an operation different from that in the low-probability mode is executed by a movable member provided in the game area, for example. Thus, the player plays the game while recognizing that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, information is output to the outside in order to allow the management computer of the gaming hall to recognize the state of the gaming machine. There is room.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

A game machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and the operation of the stop operation means is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. The game machine stops the variable display of the plurality of pictures after a predetermined period of time has passed, and gives a privilege to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 32... Special electric prize-winning device, 33... 1st operation opening, 34... 2nd operation opening, 41... Symbol display device, 51... Window part, 53... Display light emission part, 54... Speaker part, 62... Main Side MPU 63 Main side ROM 79 External terminal board 82 Sound and light side MPU 83 Sound and light side ROM 92 Display side MPU 301 External display device EX External device.

Claims (1)

Control is performed so that regularity is generated between the performance contents of the first performance and the performance contents of the second performance in the case of the corresponding state which is one of the prescribed state and the non-predetermined state. a corresponding control means;
The regularity does not occur between the performance content of the first performance and the performance content of the second performance in the non-corresponding state that is the other of the predetermined state and the state not in the predetermined state. a non-corresponding control means for controlling so as to be
determination means for executing a determination process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player;
privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the result of the determination processing being the award result;
with
As game states, there are a first state in which benefits are relatively easily granted to the player and a second state in which benefits are relatively difficult to be granted to the player,
This game machine is
means for generating the first state based on the fact that the result of the determination process is the first imparting result among the imparting results;
means for generating the second state based on the fact that the result of the determination process is the second imparting result among the imparting results;
with
The predetermined state is the second state, and a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish between the first state and the second state as the notification state of the gaming machine. and
A gaming machine characterized in that control by the non-corresponding control means is not performed when the state is the corresponding side.

Images